JP6883857B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, gaming machines that can give game benefits (prize balls, prize medals, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game are common.

Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of the gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116898

However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there is a problem that the gaming machine performance is predetermined and the advantage of the gaming cannot be changed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the advantage of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a game control means for controlling the progress of a game, an effect control means for controlling the effect of a game based on control information transmitted from the game control means, and a game medium for a player. The game control means includes the discharge control means for controlling the discharge of the above, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values, and the setting change state is started. transmitting a first control information to said presentation control means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the second control information to the presentation control means with the termination of the setting change condition, the presentation control unit, player A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a predetermined volume is provided based on the adjustment operation performed by the operation of the first operable unit , and the volume setting means is a game clerk. It is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a predetermined volume based on the adjustment operation performed by the operation of the second operation unit that can be operated by the first control information. The setting change image is displayed on a predetermined display unit upon reception, the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information, and the second control information is displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. If it is not received normally, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect sound produced by the operation of the first operation unit is heard. one set of volume situations that der impossible, an adjustment operation state capable of the volume of the presentation sound by the operation of the second operating unit, the discharge control means, the game medium has won the winning area That , or the emission control can be executed based on the operation of lending the game medium , and during the setting change state, the emission control based on the winning of the game medium in the winning area is executed. Instead, during the setting change state, the discharge control based on the lending operation of the game medium can be executed, and after the end of the setting change state and during the display of the setting change image. It is characterized in that the discharge control based on the winning of the game medium in the winning area and the discharge control based on the lending operation of the game medium can be executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the lower part of a glass frame. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control device. It is a perspective view which shows the positional relationship of various elements constituting a main control device. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control part. It is a figure which shows the dump list of the memory area in the main control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game area and the information area in a main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for a non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a game work area. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting change processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initialization trigger of a main RAM and an initialization area. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the operation error determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game ball counting process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance information calculation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the display example 1 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the display example 2 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the display example 3 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the display example 4 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the display example 5 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the display example 6 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the display example 7 of an information display. It is a figure which shows the main process of a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a payout control unit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main processing of a payout control unit. It is a figure which shows the main processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt process of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the main processing of the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing of a central control unit, and the V blank interrupt process of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the adjustment mode switching process of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the changeover switch and adjustment mode selection table. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure centering on a voice control part. It is a figure which shows the structure of the audio channel of the audio control unit. It is a figure which shows the voice management table stored in the voice ROM. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment processing of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the volume adjustment is performed while waiting for a customer. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the volume adjustment is performed during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when the setting is changed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (directing example) when the setting is changed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when RWM clear is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (directing example) when RWM clear is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when the control state of a game is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example (directing example) when the control state of a game is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when setting confirmation is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (directing example) when setting confirmation is performed.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which a game ball (game medium) flows down as a game value is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95, which will be described later, pay out based on the establishment of the granting conditions. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a game ball, and a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into an overflowing ball flow path, which will be described later, without being able to fit in the upper plate 11. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become like. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality in which the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 95 occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIGS. 1 or 2) functioning as input devices for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described later. See) are provided side by side.

The effect button device 16 sets the effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), the effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 into a normal state and a normal state. A button drive motor 17b for changing to a protruding state located above, a button vibration motor 17c (acting part) for changing the effect button 17 to a normal state and a vibrating state vibrating in a predetermined mode, and A button light emitting LED 17d (light emitting unit) for changing the effect button 17 into a light emitting state and a light emitting state that emits light in a predetermined mode is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. ..

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 6) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is rented by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the game machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the fullness detection switch 32a detects the fullness of the lower plate 12. During this period, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the player's hand are touching the launch handle 15. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) including a 15a (see FIG. 6) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 6) for firing the game ball toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board mounting frame 3. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in the closed state and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 6) for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 6) for driving the launching member, and launching from the launching member toward the lower left portion of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 6) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and the game area 5a is launched by the first firing force by the decorative frame 40. It is divided into a left game area where the game ball flows down and a right game area where the game ball launched by the second launch force stronger than the first launch force flows down, and the left game area and the right game area are divided into the right game area. Is adapted to communicate below the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced in the above can be rolled and flowed down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, the game One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the game balls that have won (winned) in the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (adding game value).

Below the stage portion 42, a first starting port 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) on which a game ball can always win (winning) is provided, and the first starting port 45 wins (wins). When the game ball (ball) is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are dispensed by the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (adding game value). In addition, the right to perform a special game determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below the right of the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning in the collision detection described later). A variable starting portion 46 is provided that can convert from a difficult closed state to a winning state of a game ball or an easy open state.

The upper surface of the variable starting portion 46 is inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to become a flow path for the game ball, and the movable member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction and directly below the movable member 48. A second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward, and a second starting port detection switch 47a (FIG. 6) that detects a game ball that has won (winned) in the second starting port 47. (Refer to), and by moving the movable member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second starting port 47 is converted to the closed state, and the movable member 48 is moved toward the rear (winning allowable position). A second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 6) is provided to convert the second starting port 47 into an open state.

Then, a game ball wins a prize at the second start port 47 which is opened during the auxiliary game described later, and this game ball is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6) (granting condition is satisfied). Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (adding game value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (here, the jackpot game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a normal map gate 44 (normal map starting area) through which a game ball can always pass is provided. When the game ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, the prize ball is not given, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game is available. It is given (the general map judgment information described later is stored).

Downstream of the Fuzu Gate 44, it is possible or easy to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit in a special game judgment). A first variable winning section 49 that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 has a first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction as well as a flow path for the game ball by inclining the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure). The first prize opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward just below the opening / closing member 51 of the first prize opening, and the first prize that detects the game ball that has won (winned) in the first prize opening. By moving the mouth detection switch 50a and the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (winning restriction position), the first large winning opening 50 is converted to the closed state, and the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 is converted. A first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the first large winning opening 50 into an open state by moving the first special winning opening 50 toward the rear (permissible winning position).

Then, when the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 moves from the winning restricted position to the winning position during the jackpot game, the first winning opening 50 is converted to the open state, and the upper surface of the first winning opening opening / closing member 51 is pressed. The flowing game ball or the game ball that has reached the first large winning opening 50 wins the first large winning opening 50. Then, when the game balls that have won the first prize opening 50 are detected by the first prize opening detection switch 50a (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out. The device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (adding game value).

Downstream of the first variable winning section 49, it is possible or easy to win a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit in a special game judgment). A second variable winning section 52 that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 52 has a second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 that can move in the front-rear direction as well as a flow path for the game ball by inclining the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure). The second prize opening 53 (winning area) that opens upward just below the opening / closing member 54 of the second prize opening, and the second prize that detects the game ball that has won (winned) in the second prize opening. By moving the mouth detection switch 53a and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second large winning opening 53 is converted to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 A second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the second large winning opening 53 into an open state by moving the second special winning opening 53 toward the rear (permissible winning position).

Then, when the second prize opening opening / closing member 54 moves from the winning restricted position to the winning allowable position during the jackpot game, the second winning opening 53 is converted to the open state, and the upper surface of the second winning opening opening / closing member 54 is pressed. The game ball that has flowed down or the game ball that has reached the second large winning opening 53 wins the second large winning opening 53. Then, when the game balls that have won the second prize opening 53 are detected by the second prize opening detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out by the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball.

Then, the game ball launched into the left game area flows down as it is along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage portion 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. A prize is won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43, the Fuzu gate 44, the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50) and the second variable winning section 52 (second large winning opening 53) provided in the right game area are won ( There is no passing).

Further, the game balls launched into the right game area include a general winning opening 43, a normal drawing gate 44, a variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), a first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), and the like. Either a prize is won in any of the second variable winning units 52 (second large winning opening 53), or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area will not be won.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53, and an out opening 39. An out-ball flow path is provided which receives the out-balls composed of the inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down while collecting them, and an out-ball detection switch 57a (see FIG. 6) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game balls that flow down the out-ball flow path and are detected by the out-ball detection switch 57a are discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, there is a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold. A hold display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and a jackpot game (special game) described later. ) A right-handed display 67 is provided to encourage the player to launch a game ball toward the right game area during a medium or high-probability game state.

The first special symbol display 60 is for displaying (notifying) the result of a special game determination (big hit determination of the first special symbol) performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. It is a variable display, and the second special symbol display 61 displays the result of a special game determination (big hit determination of the second special symbol) performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. It is a variable display for (notifying), and the normal symbol display 62 determines the result of the auxiliary game determination (normal symbol hit determination) performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44. It is a variable display for displaying (notifying).

The special game judgment is special figure judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, reach judgment) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. It corresponds to acquiring a random number value, a random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a special game determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the first special symbol (notifying) is performed. Further, when a special game determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the second special symbol (notifying) is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode indicating the result of the special game determination (big hit mode, small hit mode, loss mode).

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the big hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the big prize opening (first big prize opening 50, second big winning opening 53) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times (with an interval). For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a prize ball by a player who performs the game twice, 16 times, etc.).

The maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 53) in each round game are predetermined, but before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) are won (winned) in the large winning opening, one round game is completed. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player can be executed.

Further, the "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the small hit game (special game) in the special game determination. "Small hit game" means that a player who plays a game in which the big winning opening (second big winning opening 53) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a more disadvantageous manner than a big hit game is easy to win a prize ball. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Although the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in the small hit game is predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning balls) in the large winning opening even before the maximum opening time is reached. ) Then the small hit game ends. In addition, unlike the big hit game, the game state does not change based on (caused by) the execution of the small hit game.

Auxiliary game judgment is the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44. Is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired general map determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating (notifying) the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) indicating the result of the auxiliary game determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 is used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (winning), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first special symbol hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. This is for displaying the number of 1st special figure reservations, and is lit or blinking in an manner indicating the number of 1st special figure reservations. In addition, although the first special figure hold is stored up to four, it may be less than four or more.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second special symbol hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of second special figure reservations, and is lit or blinking in an manner indicating the number of second special figure reservations. It should be noted that the maximum number of the second special figure hold is stored up to four, but the number may be less than or more than four, or the second special figure hold may not be stored. Good.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of normal figure hold numbers stored when a game ball wins (passes) at the normal figure gate 44. Is to be displayed, and is lit or blinks in a manner indicating the number of pending figures. It should be noted that although the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, the number of hold of the normal figure may be less than or more than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "3" or "7" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed. It is advisable to repeat turning off and "-".

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is the lower part of the effect space 40a to display the first image. A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display having a size and a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided in front of the device 70, and is provided above the effect space 40a. A movable effect device 73 for executing the motion effect is provided, and a variation notification LED 59 for notifying the execution state of the variation display of the special symbol is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not executed, a variation effect accompanied by the effect symbol 70a variation display performed during the execution of the special symbol variation display, and a jackpot game are being executed. There is a big hit production etc. performed in.

Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving the second image display device 71 by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like during execution of the variation effect on the first image display device 70. It has become.

Specifically, a standby position (first position) located closer to the end (lower) of the first image display device 70 and an effect position (second position) located closer to the center (upper) of the first image display device 70. The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the position). The movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and execution of variable effect A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode according to the above is formed.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "8", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the special game determination (big hit determination). The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777", and the loss mode is another mode.

The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or it may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. Good.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as a background image and a character, a movie, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image according to the result of the special game determination. By displaying the image on the device 71, the player's expectation that the jackpot game (special game) is executed is increased.

The first image display device 70 has a first hold icon display area 70C (first hold area) for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold display) corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1). ), The second hold icon display area 70D (second hold area) for displaying the number of second hold icons (second hold display) corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2), and the special figure hold. The icon display area 70E (digestion hold area) and the like for displaying the icon (digestion hold display) indicating that the variation effect executed by subtracting the number is being executed are formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70C is the first display unit 70C1 (first area), the second display unit 70C2 (second area), and the third display unit 70C3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70E. , 4th display unit 70C4 (4th area), and 1st display unit 70C1 to 4th display unit 70C4 have a number of 1st hold corresponding to the 1st special figure hold number (U1). The icon is displayed.

Specifically, the first display unit 70C1 first displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the second display unit 70C2 displays the second. The first hold icon indicating the first hold memory is displayed on the third display unit 70C3, and the first special symbol variation display is executed third on the third display unit 70C3. The first hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70C4 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D includes a first display unit 70D1 (first area), a second display unit 70D2 (second area), a third display unit 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display unit 70D4 (from the left side). The first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 first displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second. The second hold icon indicating the second hold memory is displayed on the third display unit 70D3, and the second special symbol variation display is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70E is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first hold icon display area 70C and the second hold icon display area 70D, and rides on or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as shown.

Specifically, the first hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70E with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). By moving (shifting) and moving (shifting) the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70C1 to the icon display area 70E, the icon becomes the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed. The icon disappears (erases) at the end of.

In addition, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70E with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). ), The second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70E to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 is used to display the variation of the effect symbol 70a, but the second image display device 71 may be used to display the variation of the effect symbol. Both the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may perform variable display of the effect symbol 70a.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the first movable member 73a during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute the operation effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located closer to the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and closer to the center (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (rise, fall) to and from the position of the effect position (second position). The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position that recedes from the front of the first movable member 73a. ..

The fluctuation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and is provided with a first fluctuation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second fluctuation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts a color change (variation display of the first special symbol) in response to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and colors in response to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is variable display. The second variation notification LED 59b starts a color change (variation display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and colors in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is variable display.

In addition, the result of the variation display (special game determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the stopped display effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol, and the combination of the stop display effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol is performed. The result of the variation display (special game range) of the second special symbol may be notified by. In addition, the result of the variation display (special game determination) of the first special symbol is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the variation display (special game determination) of the second special symbol is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. ) May be notified.

Further, instead of displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first fluctuation notification LED 59a or the second fluctuation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed on the first image display device 70 or the first image display device 70 or the second special symbol. 2 The image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game supplied from a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. In response to a game ball storage unit 96 that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a payout control command from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 95, and an effect control device 130A having a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect in response to an effect control command from the main control board 110. , Power supply device 160A with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, game information for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) An output terminal plate 90 or the like is provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided so that the left and right other sides open and close in the left and right directions around a rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes a volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74). A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the amount of light is provided.

(Configuration of main controller)
Next, the configuration of the main control device 110A that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device 110A.

The main control device 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for accommodating the main control board 110 inside, and a sealing seal for restricting the opening of the board case. The 104 and the transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the seal seal 104 are provided.

On the front surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110 m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110 m are cleared or the game is advantageous (game). (Different advantages) Input a signal for updating the set value RWM clear switch 111a, a signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key. The setting key switch 112a for inputting the above, the information display 113 for displaying the performance information and the set value that can grasp the actual performance of the gaming machine, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying the set value and performance information (normal base value described later) described later, and is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP. .. Then, identification segments for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information are configured on the 7-segment displays 113a and 113b, and the set values and the numerical values of the performance information are indicated by the 7-segment displays 113c and 113d. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information is configured.

The substrate case has a concave lower case member 101 in which the portion facing the back surface side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave upper case member 102 in which the portion facing the front surface side of the main control board 110 is open. The lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 are closed to form a storage space for accommodating the main control board 110.

At the end of the board case, a sealing portion for sealing the board case with the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 in a state of accommodating the main control board 110 closed, and a lower case member 101. A sticking portion for sticking the sealing seal 104 is provided straddling the upper case member 102.

The sealing portion is composed of a lower fixing portion 101a provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper fixing portion 102a provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower fixing portion 101a. Then, the substrate case is sealed by screwing a one-way screw whose rotation in the removal direction is restricted from the upper fixing portion 102a to the lower fixing portion 101a.

The sticking portion is composed of a lower sticking portion 101b provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper sticking portion 102b provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower sticking portion 101b. Then, the substrate case is sealed by sticking the sealing sticker 104 across the lower sticking portion 101b and the upper sticking portion 102b.

The seal cover member 105 is formed in a concave chamber shape with one side open. Then, the seal seal 104 is protected by attaching the seal seal 104 to the substrate case so as to include the affixed portion in which the seal seal 104 is attached.

On the upper surface of the upper case member 102, a model name sticker 106 on which the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed and a control number sticker 107 on which the control number of the main control board 110 is printed are arranged side by side. It is pasted in the state. Further, an operating member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operating member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion 112 for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. The insertion portion 112 has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a turns ON and the setting key cannot be pulled out from the keyhole, and is turned to the left. When the position is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key is removed from the keyhole.

(Positional relationship of various elements)
Next, the positional relationship of various elements constituting the main control device 110A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the positional relationship of various elements constituting the main control device 110A.

The model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107 are located above the step portion formed in the lower portion of the upper case member 102 in the left-right direction, and are arranged horizontally near the center of the upper case member 102 in the lateral direction. It is pasted like this. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the printed contents.

The main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer is located in the center of the main control board 110 near the upper side, and is displaced upward so as not to overlap the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107. It is mounted with the printed surface on which the product name etc. is printed facing upward. Therefore, the main control unit 110m is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107, and the printed surface can be easily confirmed from the upper side of the substrate case.

The information display 113 is mounted side by side at positions shifted to the right and upward so as not to overlap the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107 on the right side of the main control board 110 near the upper side. Has been done. Therefore, the information display 113 is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107, and the displayed contents can be easily confirmed.

In the sealing seal 104, the portion attached to the upper surface (surface) of the attachment portion formed by the upper attachment portion 102b is closer to the main control board 110 than the model name seal 106 and the control number seal 107 (with the upper surface of the upper case member 102). , Between the upper surface of the information display 113), and the portion attached to the lower surface (bottom surface) of the attachment portion formed by the lower attachment portion 101b is located below (back side) of the information display 113. doing.

As the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit unit including four 7-segment displays and a board is unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable that the model name sticker 106 and the control number sticker 107 are staggered so as not to overlap each other so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded).

Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on the dedicated board. It may be mounted and board-to-board connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power supply board 160 if the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 or may be provided on the back surface side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main control unit 110m.

Further, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal of may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110 or the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be mounted as a position that the player cannot operate. It may be provided on the 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, and eventually. The performance information may be displayed on one of the indicators, and the set value may be displayed on the other indicator.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 6 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like. It has 110m.

The input / output ports of the main control unit 110 m include a general winning port detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start port detection switch 45a, a second start port detection switch 47a, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, and a first large. Winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, 2nd winning opening detection switch 53a, 2nd winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a, first 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, a right-handed display 67, a game information output terminal board 90, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

To the input / output port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95, and a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. Do.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input / output port, and the like.
A ball feed solenoid 11b, a touch sensor 15a, a firing volume 15b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch solenoid has a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. 28b is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control board 130 displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command 130 m from the effect control unit 130 m. A display control unit 140 that controls audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of effect control commands from the effect control unit 130 m. It has.

The effect control unit 130 m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

An effect button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc. are performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m to control the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or the sound output device 9 to display a predetermined sound. And control to output sound.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130 m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. Image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and audio output based on reception of audio control commands from the overall control unit 141. It includes a voice control unit 148 that controls the device 9, and a voice ROM 149 that stores voice data and the like.

The integrated control unit 141 is connected to the integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, the integrated ROM 141b that stores the integrated control program, the integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and the image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148. It has an output port.

The integrated CPU 141a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process and an audio output device for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140. Control processing and the like for generating a voice control command instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 are performed.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, a frame lighting device 10, a button drive motor 17b, and a button vibration motor. It is provided with 17c, a button light emitting LED 17d, and an input / output port.

A frame lighting device 10, a button drive motor 17b, a button vibration motor 17c, a button light emitting LED 17d, a movable effect device 73, and a panel lighting device 74 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control unit 150.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (power failure has occurred), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (power failure). A disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 when the power is cut off (power failure) are provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even when the power switch is OFF, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control unit 130 m is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 to generate a voltage drop detection signal. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than the predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is used as the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and effect control. It is supplied to the sub RAM 130c of the unit 130 m. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored.

Although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120, the backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). ..

Further, although the backup power supply is supplied to the effect control unit 130 m, if it is not necessary to retain the stored contents of the sub RAM 130c when the power is cut off (power failure), the backup power source is supplied to the effect control unit 130 m. It may not be supplied.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special game determination (big hit determination) has a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is a "non-time saving game". It has a "state" and a "time saving game state". Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) "Low-probability non-time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state,
(2) "Low-probability time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(3) A "high-probability time-saving game state", which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, is provided.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state will be referred to as a "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. In addition, the game state during the jackpot game is also set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", but the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, the "low probability gaming state" is, for example, when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) at the stage of the advantage of the game is "1", the first start port 45 or the second start In the special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that the game ball enters the mouth 47, the winning probability of the big hit is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" means that when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is set as high as about 1/60, so that the player is compared with the low probability gaming state. It refers to a game state that is advantageous to. The transition from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the winning probability of winning is set as low as 1/16 in the auxiliary game judgment (hit judgment) performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal map gate 44, which is normal. It refers to a gaming state in which the average time of the variation display of the symbol is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a hit is won is set to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "time saving game state", the winning probability is set as high as 15/16, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and the winning is won. 2. By setting the opening time of the starting port 47 to 5 seconds, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in which the consumption of the gaming ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving gaming state. The transition from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

It should be noted that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are set to be more advantageous in the "time-saving game state" than in the "non-time-saving game state". , The average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

In addition, the winning probability in the auxiliary game judgment in the non-time saving game state is the same without changing depending on the set value, but it is different depending on the set value so that the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. May be good. In addition, the winning probability in the auxiliary game judgment in the time-saving game state is the same without changing depending on the set value, but it is different depending on the set value so that the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. May be good.

(Memory map of main control unit)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area including a main ROM 110b and a main RAM 110c of a main control unit 110m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b is a game ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area (A000H) in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. ~ A52EH), an unused area (A52FH ~ A6FFH) of 16 bytes or more in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a ROM comment area (A700H ~) in which data such as a program title and version are stored. A77FH), a vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set, and an HW parameter area (A7A8H to) in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set. A7FFFH) are arranged in order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ), The game data area (9000H to 9996H) in which data related to the progress of the game is stored, and the second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. Have been placed.

The information ROM area is an information program area (A000H to A437H) in which a program related to performance display of a gaming machine is stored, and an unused area (A438H to A47FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. The information data areas (A480H to A52EH) in which the data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored are arranged in this order.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work (work area) when executing a game program, and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program. (0190H to 01FFH) are arranged in order.

The game RWM area includes a game work area (0000H to 0128H) used as a work by the game program, a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. A game stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving the data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) Are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the setting value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area includes an information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used by the information program as a work, an unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information program. The information stack areas (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving the data being processed are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

(Dump list in RWM area)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a dump list when the contents of the memory area of the main control unit 110 m are output to a printer or a display. In FIG. 8, a plurality of areas surrounded by squares are unused areas in which "0" is stored.

In the game RWM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 73 bytes or more between the game work area (0000H to 0128H) and the game stack area (0172H to 017FH). .. Therefore, a boundary line separating the game work area and the game stack area is formed by the unused area, and the game work area and the game stack area can be easily separated in the debugging work and inspection of the game machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the information RWM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 2 bytes between the information work area (0190H to 01E8H) and the information stack area (01EBH to 01FFH). Therefore, a boundary separating the information work area and the information stack area is formed by the unused area, and the information work area and the information stack area can be easily distinguished in the debugging work and inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to (recognize).

Further, the unused area in which "0" is stored after the game stack area (0172H to 017FH) is set from 0180H, which is a multiple of 16, from 0180H to 16 bytes, and the information work area (after this unused area) ( 0190H to 01E8H) is set from 0190H, which is a multiple of 16. Therefore, a boundary line separating the game RWM area and the information RWM area is formed by the unused area, and the game RWM area and the information RWM area can be easily separated in the debugging work and inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the game ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 1059 bytes between the game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) and the game data area (9000H to 9966H). Therefore, a boundary line separating the game program area and the game data area is formed by the unused area, and the game program area and the game data area can be easily separated in the debugging work and inspection of the game machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the information ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 72 bytes between the information program area (A000H to A437H) and the information data area (A480H to A52EH). Therefore, the unused area forms a boundary separating the information program area and the information data area, and the information program area and the information data area can be easily distinguished in the debugging work and inspection of the game machine 1. It becomes possible to (recognize).

Further, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 1673 bytes after the game data area (9000H to 9996H), and the information program area is a multiple of 16 after this unused area from A000H. It is set. Therefore, a boundary line separating the game ROM area and the information ROM area is formed by the unused area, and the game ROM area and the information ROM area can be easily separated in the debugging work and the inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

In the game ROM area and the information ROM area, an unused area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the program area and the data area, but this unused area may be 16 bytes or less, or the program area. It is not necessary to provide an unused area between the data area and the data area.

Further, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game ROM area, this unused area is not provided in the game ROM area, but is provided at the beginning of the information ROM area (before the information program area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game ROM area and the information ROM area so as not to belong to the game ROM area and the information ROM area (between the game data area and the information program area). May be provided with an unused area.

Further, in the game RWM area and the information RWM area, an unused area of a predetermined byte is provided between the work area and the stack area, but this unused area may be 16 bytes or more, or 16 bytes. It may be as follows, and an unused area may not be provided between the data area and the stack area.

Further, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game RWM area, this unused area is not provided in the game RWM area, but is provided at the beginning of the information RWM area (before the information work area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game RWM area and the information RWM area so as not to belong to the game RWM area and the information RWM area (between the game stack area and the information work area). May be provided with an unused area.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
FIG. 9 shows a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. It is a figure which shows the relationship with.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when performing processing based on the game program, the main CPU 110a basically refers to the game data area and uses the game RWM area as a work for the game. The contents of the RWM area are referenced and updated. In addition, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the processing based on the information program is performed, the information program is called after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program for information. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is executed and the process based on the information program is completed and the program is returned to the game program.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program. There will be no such thing.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol referred to in the special game determination (big hit determination) performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. Reference numeral 10 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol referred to in the special game determination (big hit determination) performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, the current set value, the probability game state when performing the jackpot determination, the random value for the jackpot determination, and the determination of the jackpot determination The results (big hit, small hit, loss) are associated with each other, and for reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of "big hit" or "small hit" is described in the rightmost column.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, the current set value, the probability game state when performing the jackpot determination, the random value for the jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination are displayed. The judgment result (big hit, loss) is associated with, and for reference, the approximate probability of being a "big hit" or "small hit" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10A or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10B, and refers to the current set value and the current probability game. Based on the state and the random value for determining the jackpot, it is determined whether it is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10A, when the set value is "1" and the game is in a low-probability gaming state, 200 pieces of "100" to "299" are used. The jackpot determination random value is determined to be "big hit", and when the game is in a high probability gaming state, 1000 jackpot determination random values from "100" to "1099" are determined to be "big hit". Further, regardless of whether the game is in the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, 200 jackpot determination random numbers of "2000" to "2199" are determined to be "small hits". Therefore, a random value for jackpot determination other than the jackpot or small hit is determined to be "missing".

A feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 10 is that the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the small hit probability does not change and is constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the high probability game state is 5 times the probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability game state (common regardless of the set value), but it is judged as a big hit. The probability of being performed is not limited to 5 times, and any value such as 3 times or 8 times may be set as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, although the small hit is not set in the big hit judgment table for the second special symbol, the small hit may be set so as to have the same probability as the big hit judgment table for the first special symbol. The small hit may be set so that the probability is different from that of the big hit determination table for the first special symbol.

In addition, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher). It may be.

Further, all the set values (1 to 4) may have the same probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state, and for example, two or three set values (2 or 3 setting values) may be set. In 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11A is a special symbol determination table for jackpots that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 11B is a special symbol determination table when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol determination table for loss that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the symbol, and FIG. 11 (c) is for the small hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a small hit. This is a special symbol judgment table.

As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, in the special symbol determination table, the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random value for the special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination thereof. The stop special symbol data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other.

The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols for executing the first jackpot game in which 16 round games are executed, and the special symbols "02" and "05" are 16 rounds. It is a jackpot special symbol that executes the second jackpot game in which the game is executed, and "03" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the third jackpot game in which the two round games are executed. Further, the special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the special symbol "20" is a small hit special symbol in which the small hit game is executed.

Although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. May be good.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11A to 11C, and determines the special symbol based on the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol and the random value for determining the special symbol. The type, stop special symbol data, and special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of the big hit special symbol, the type of the lost special symbol, and the type of the small hit special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. At least one of the big hit special symbol and the small hit special symbol may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols, the selection ratio of various lost symbols, and the selection ratio of various small hit symbols do not change depending on the set value and are constant. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 12 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state, which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table for a time-saving game state that is sometimes referred to.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, in each special symbol variation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol for which the variation is displayed, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data), and Reach judgment random number value, first special figure holding number (U1) or second special figure holding number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, special figure fluctuation pattern as judgment result, special symbol The fluctuation time of is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify at least the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Also, if the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is lost, the reach judgment random value is referred to, but in the case of a big hit, reach occurs except in special cases, so the reach judgment random value is not referred to. Has been done.

In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost, the number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) increases. , The fluctuation pattern is determined so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table shown in FIG. 12 or 13, and determines the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the judgment result of the special symbol (stop special figure data), the random value for reach judgment, and the first special figure hold. Based on the number (U1) or the second special figure hold number (U2), and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are determined, and the special figure is determined. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, since the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variation effect based on the special figure variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) as described later, FIGS. 12 and 13 In the rightmost column of each special figure pattern determination table shown in (1), the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or 13, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "long variation", and "ultra-shortening variation" are three effect symbols 70a at high speed. It means that it fluctuates and stops without reaching, the normal fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation, and the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation. The ultra-shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the shortened fluctuation.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode to be caused. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), the same effect symbol 70a is "7" in the left side region and the right side region. Refers to a mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped at.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the reach with the lowest expectation of a big hit. It has become. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.

In addition, "SP reach" is performed after the normal reach, and is a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and a special effect is made to expect the player to perform the jackpot game using almost the entire display area of the image display device. It is supposed to do.

In addition, "SPSP reach" is a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect rather than "SP reach".

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach that is a big hit. For example, all three effect symbols 70a are the same and fluctuate at a low speed in a state of being aligned, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect than "SPSP reach".

In addition, the "chance production" is a production that incites whether it will be a big hit or a small hit. For example, although the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, they are not in the reach state, and a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the special figure variation pattern is determined in the time-saving gaming state rather than the special figure variation pattern is determined in the non-time-saving gaming state. The point is that it is easier to determine a relatively short fluctuation time (the average fluctuation time is shorter). Therefore, it is possible to change the fluctuation time of the special symbol between the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the type of the special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The selection ratio of each special figure fluctuation pattern may be changed for each set value, may be changed between an odd number setting and an even number setting, or may be a low setting (for example, 1 to 2). It may be changed depending on whether the setting is high (for example, 3 to 4). In addition, a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may be provided for each set value, a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may be provided for one of the odd number setting and the even number setting, and a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may not be provided for the other. A dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may be provided on one of the low setting and the high setting, and a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may not be provided on the other.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 14A is a first reference in the pre-judgment in which the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is determined before the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. It is a pre-judgment table for a special symbol, and FIG. 14 (b) shows the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 before the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is a figure which shows the pre-determination table for the 2nd special symbol which is referred in the pre-determination of determination.

As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the game state, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the random value for special symbol judgment, the random value for reach judgment, and the special figure are displayed in the pre-judgment table. A random value for determining a variation pattern, a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and a start opening winning designation command indicating a special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated with each other.

In the preliminary judgment of the special symbol judgment information, it is possible to judge whether it is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss" by the big hit judgment random value, and it is possible to judge the type of the special symbol by the special symbol judgment random value. Since the type of the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern to be executed can be determined in advance by the reach judgment random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, whether it is a big hit or a small hit from the start opening winning designation command. Whether or not, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol schedule fluctuation pattern can be specified.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B, and refers to a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern. Based on the numerical values, the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern and the start opening prize designation command are determined, and the start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Large winning opening opening mode judgment table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening mode determination table for changing the state of the first big winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 53 in the big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the large winning opening opening mode determination table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the type of the large winning opening to be opened, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, and the large winning opening in one round game are displayed. For the maximum number of winnings, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening in each round game, and one opening of each round game. The opening time of the big winning opening, the closing interval time for closing the big winning opening after the end of the round game, and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the big hit game are associated with each other.

When the stop special figure data is "01", the main CPU 110a executes the first big hit game, and when the stop special figure data is "02", the main CPU 110a is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit game. When the two jackpot games are executed and the stop special figure data is "03", the third jackpot game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second jackpot game, is executed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting a game state after the jackpot game is completed. In the game state setting table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving game flag indicating the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state can be executed. The time saving number (J) indicating the number of fluctuation displays, the high-probability game flag indicating the high-probability gaming state, and the high-probability number (X) indicating the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the high-probability gaming state. It is associated.

Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data, the time saving game flag, the time saving number of times (J), the high probability game flag, and the high The number of probabilities (X) is determined.

When the high probability game state is set, the high probability number (X) may be set to 50,000 times, but in the high probability game state, the jackpot winning probability is 1/60. Since the next jackpot winning is substantially confirmed, the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game are jackpot games in which the next jackpot game is confirmed.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that even if the same stop special figure data is used, the time saving game flag is set and the time saving number of times is set based on the winning state data (the game state at the time of winning the big hit). There is a point that (J) may be different.

Specifically, in the case of the stop special figure data 01 (special symbol 01), "00H" indicating a low probability non-time saving game state is stored as the winning state data for the time saving game flag and the time saving number of times (J). If so, the time saving game flag is not set at the end of the jackpot game, and the time saving number (J) is set to 0 times. On the other hand, if "01H" indicating a low probability time saving game state and "02H" indicating a high probability time saving game state are stored as winning state data, the time saving game flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. , Set the time reduction number (J) to 100 times. As a result, the number of time reductions (J) can be changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the player can be interested in the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the types of the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag to be set are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Various storage areas for game work areas)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the game work area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a special diagram in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 45 and / or the second start port 47 is stored. It is a figure which shows the determination information storage area, FIG. 17 (b) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired when passing through is stored, and FIG. 17 (d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal map determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70C1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70C. It corresponds to the unit 70C2, the third display unit 70C3, and the fourth display unit 70C4, respectively. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display unit 70D1 and the second display unit 70D2 of the second reservation icon display area 70D. Corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first special figure reservation number (U1), and these special figure determinations are made. The number of first hold icons corresponding to the information will be displayed on the first display units 70C1 to the fourth display units 70C4 of the first hold icon display area 70C. Further, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information becomes the second special figure reservation number (U2), and corresponds to these determination information. The number of hold icons will be displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display units 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70E. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70E.

As shown in FIG. 17B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random value.

Then, when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored most in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the number of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is the smallest in which the special figure determination information is not stored. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

When the start condition of the variation display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The determination information is shifted and will be referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the normal map determination information storage area varies from the normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a normal map determination information storage area in which display is being executed, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. In addition, the number of the normal figure determination information stored in the 1st storage part to the 4th storage part of the normal figure determination information hold storage area becomes the normal figure hold number.

As shown in FIG. 17D, each storage unit has a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random value and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern for storing a random value for determining a normal map variation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the Fuzu gate 44 and the Fuzu determination information is acquired, it is acquired in the storage unit having the smallest number in which the Fuzu determination information is not stored in the Fuzu determination information reservation storage area. The normal map judgment information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal figure judgment information execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal figure judgment information stored in the first storage unit of the normal figure judgment information hold storage area shifts. And will usually be referenced to perform variable display of symbols.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart. In the following description, the processing that is not clearly stated to be the processing based on the information program shall be the processing based on the game program.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, a preparatory process for starting the control of the game, a setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on the RWM clear operation. Performs RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, and the like. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random number value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is moved to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, a momentary power failure is possible in which the voltage of the power supply drops for a moment. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is moved to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is moved to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt, which will be described later, and a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the entire RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up (power recovery) in a predetermined area of the game RWM area, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when a momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

When the power is cut off (complete power failure), the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program and saved in the game RWM area, but the checksum is saved by the information program. May be calculated and saved in the information RWM area.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to start up so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching device 26 to launch the game ball.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S17 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step S18 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the entire RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, one checksum (abnormality determination data) is calculated without distinguishing between the game RWM area and the information RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a, the RWM clear switch 111a, and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is moved to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is moved to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, is changed (updated) to initialize the control state of the game (for the game). Performs the process for initializing the area other than the set value area of the RWM area). The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. If there is no setting changing flag, the process is moved to step S23 assuming that the previous power off did not occur during the setting change process, and if there is a setting changing flag, the previous power off is the setting change process. The process is moved to step S22 on the assumption that it has occurred inside. The setting changing flag is saved in the game RWM area in the setting change process described later.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs an unrecoverable error process. Specifically, after displaying error information indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error specification command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130, timer allocation is performed. Prohibit interrupts After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 to power the power supply. The process of waiting until the supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation, the setting is not canceled. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. During an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and the image display device displays an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings." ”) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error has occurred from the audio output device 9. It is to output the non-recoverable error sound ("It is a non-recoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as a transition to the RWM clear mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and displays the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "123") at the time of power-on on the image display device. Or, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the sound output device 9. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that the fact has been output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the open detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S27 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S28.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S27. Specifically, a process for displaying the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 is performed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification.

The "power recovery notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and a power recovery screen (image) indicating that the power has been restored is specified on the image display device. It can be displayed for a period (for example, 30 seconds), the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 can be fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or sound can be heard. A power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) indicating that the power supply has been restored (from a power failure) from the output device 9 is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations, and a process for displaying the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon on the image display device is performed.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), permits all interrupts in step S32, and ends the initial setting process this time. ..

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation, which is a nuisance to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when there is a setting changing flag, that is, when the previous power off occurs during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game. As a result, the game does not proceed in a state where the set value not intended by the game store is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

Although the open detection switch 31a is included in the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it may not be included that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. Good.

Further, when it is determined that there is no backup flag (it is the first power-on) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S20, an unrecoverable error process is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. At the same time, the information RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the information program, and the process may be transferred to step S25.

Further, when it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S20, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. , The information RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the information program, and the process may be transferred to step S25.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent, the current game state is sent. The game state specification command indicating the above may be transmitted.

Further, when the power is turned off or the power is turned on, the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. .. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, but the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area are calculated separately. , If one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may shift to non-recoverable error processing.

Further, although the checksum of the RWM area is used to determine the abnormality of the RWM area, the abnormality of the RWM area is determined by the RWM parity adjustment data calculated so that the exclusive OR of the RWM area becomes 0. You may do so.

Further, by not determining the presence / absence of the setting changing flag, the unrecoverable error processing may not be performed even if the previous power failure occurs during the setting change.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a saves the setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. The presence or absence of the setting changing flag will be referred to in step S21 of the above-mentioned initial setting process.

In step S19-2, the output of the setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. As a result, processing for receiving the setting changing signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the image display device, or to display the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 while the setting is being changed. It is to turn on all lights with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area (determination information area, game data area, etc.) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the power is turned off is not inherited. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started from the low probability non-time saving game state.

In step 19-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process at the time of calling the information program. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling a predetermined information program by a CALL instruction is performed.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM matches the checksum calculated in step S17 described above. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the RWM area), the process is transferred to step S19-7, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the RWM area), the process is performed in step S19-8. To move.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the error information area (other than the performance information area) of the information RWM area. As a result, the error determination state is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the error determination state before the power is turned off is not inherited. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started assuming that no error has occurred.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) all areas (performance information area, error information area) of the information RWM area. As a result, the data for calculating the performance information of the gaming machine 1 and the error determination state are initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the information RWM area before the power is turned off. Data will not be inherited. Specifically, the progress control of the game is started assuming that there is no history of the game.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a performs the game program return processing. Specifically, the process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is in the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process is moved to step S19-12, and the set value is not in the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). In this case, in step S19-11, the initial value "1" is set in the set value. At this point, only a provisional set value is set, and the initial value of the set value is not saved in the set value area of the game RWM area.

In step S19-12, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating a set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-14, and if there is no set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-17.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value by +1 in step S19-14, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-15. Specifically, when the updated set value is "5" that exceeds the appropriate range, the process of correcting the set value to "1" is performed.

In step S19-16, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is updated. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the updated set value by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value determination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-18 assuming that the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process is transferred to step S19-13 as there is a possibility that the process will be performed.

In step S19-18, the main CPU 110a saves the set value in the set value area of the game RWM area, ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-19, and in step S19-20. , The output of the setting changing signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is terminated. As a result, processing for ending the reception of the setting changing signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

In step S19-21, the main CPU 110a clears the setting changing flag saved in the game RWM area, and ends the current setting change process.

After that, in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, a power-on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and a process for ending the setting change notification and executing the power-on notification is performed. It will be done.

In this way, even if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value "1" is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the gaming machine. However, it is possible to improve the reliability of the pachinko / pachislot machine by preventing the pachinko / pachislot machine from causing trouble to the pachinko / pachislot machine.

In addition, the setting changing signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 immediately after the setting change processing is started, and the output of the setting changing signal is finished immediately before the setting change processing is completed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the processing (setting change) related to security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer), and it is possible to use it for the detection of fraudulent activities. Become.

Also, if the checksum is normal, only the error information area is initialized in the information RWM area, so while leaving the data saved in the performance information area (usually history information such as base values). , The state related to the error determination can be initialized for the convenience of the game hall side, and the convenience can be improved.

Further, during the setting change process (display of the setting changing screen), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, Monitors the presence or absence of signal input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a). It is designed not to be done.

That is, the occurrence of winning (winning) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53). Even if a prize is generated during the setting change process (display of the setting changing screen) because it is not monitored (detected) (the payout number specification command described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), the prize is invalid. As a result, the game balls are not paid out. In addition, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (the error specification command described later is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), an error occurs during the setting change process (display of the setting changing screen). Is not notified of errors. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent act will be performed by the player while the setting is being changed.

The game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the set value confirmation operation is performed, but the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initially initialized after the set value confirmation operation is performed. You may try to do the conversion. Specifically, the processes from step S19-4 to step S19-9 may be performed after step S19-18. Further, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before the set value confirmation operation and after the set value confirmation operation.

Further, although the setting value confirmation operation was set so that the setting key switch 112a was changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the RWM clear switch 111a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be turned OFF. The state may be changed from the state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the opening detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be turned on.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

(Modification example of setting change processing)
A modified example of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the setting change processing of the main control board 110. Here, only the part different from the setting change process of FIG. 20 will be described, and the same step number will be assigned to the matching part and the description will be omitted.

In the modification of the setting change process shown in FIG. 21, steps S19-17A and S19-17B are provided between steps S19-17 and S19-18 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 20.

In step S19-17A, the control CPU 141a displays the set value determined on the information display 113. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is maintained, and the DP (decimal point) of the 7-segment LED on which the set value is displayed is turned on. As a result, the game clerk can confirm that the set value has been determined by checking the information display 113 and can grasp the determined set value.

In step S19-17B, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not there has been a setting change end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RW clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a setting change end operation, the process is transferred to step S19-18 to end the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change end operation, the process of step S19-17B is repeated.

In this way, since the set value confirmed until the setting change end operation is performed is displayed on the information display 113, the confirmed set value can be accurately grasped, and the game clerk overlooks the confirmed set value. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience.

In addition, since the display mode of the set value before confirmation and the display mode of the set value after confirmation are different, it is possible to accurately grasp that the set value has been confirmed, and the setting change is completed before the setting value confirmation operation is performed. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as performing operations.

The game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the set value confirmation operation is performed, but the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initially initialized after the set value confirmation operation is performed. You may try to do the conversion. Specifically, the processes from step S19-4 to step S19-9 may be performed after step S19-17A. Further, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before the set value confirmation operation and after the set value confirmation operation.

Further, although the setting change end operation was set to change the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, the release detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be turned OFF. The state may be changed from the state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the opening detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be turned on.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is in the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process is moved to step S24-2, and the set value is not in the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). If so, the process is transferred to step S24-10.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting an RWM clearing signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM is being cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. As a result, processing for receiving the RWM clearing signal is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the RWM clear preparation notification for notifying that the RWM clear is performed.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is performed by operating the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed on the image display device, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are cleared by RWM. During the confirmation, all the lights are turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a confirmation sound indicating that the RWM clear is being confirmed (“The RWM is cleared by operating the RWM clear switch”).

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-4 whether or not a clear confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a clear confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S24-5, and if there is no clear confirmation operation, the process of step S24-4 is repeated.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) a region other than the set value region of the game RWM region of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data (other than the set value) of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs an information program call-time process. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling a predetermined information program by a CALL instruction is performed.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) an error information area to be used for various error determinations in the information RWM area. As a result, the error determination state is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the error determination state before clearing the RWM is not inherited.

In step S24-8, the main CPU 110a performs the game program return processing. Specifically, the process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S24-9, the main CPU 110a ends the output of the RWM clearing signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. As a result, processing for ending the reception of the RWM clearing signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer or the like). When this process is completed, the current RWM clear process is completed.

After that, in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, a power-on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and a process for ending the RWM clear preparation notification and executing the power-on notification. Will be done.

The main CPU 110a performs an unrecoverable error process in step S24-10. Specifically, after displaying the set value error information on the information display 113 and transmitting the non-recoverable error specification command indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130, the timer interruption is prohibited. After setting the interruption prohibition and clearing the output port, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error, and the power supply is completely supplied. Performs the process of waiting until it is refused.

In this way, when the set value is not within the appropriate range, the progress of the game is stopped. The non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the gaming machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the inconvenience to the amusement shop and the player.

Further, the RWM clearing signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 immediately after the RWM clearing process is started, and the output of the RWM clearing signal is terminated immediately before the RWM clearing process is completed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the processing related to security (RWM clear) has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer), and it is possible to use it for the detection of fraudulent activities. Become.

Further, during the RWM clear process (display of the clear confirmation screen), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, first 2 Does not monitor the presence or absence of signal input from the starting port detection switch 47a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a). It has become like.

That is, the occurrence of winning (winning) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53). Even if a prize is generated during the RWM clear process (display of the clear confirmation screen) because it is not monitored (detected) (the payout number specification command described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), the prize is invalid. The game ball is not paid out. In addition, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (error specification command is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), error notification is performed even if an error occurs during RWM clear processing (display of clear confirmation screen). Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player is playing a game or cheating while the RWM is being cleared.

When it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is not in the appropriate range, the process shifts to the non-recoverable error processing, but when it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is not in the appropriate range. , The initial value "1" may be set in the set value, and the process may proceed to the process of step S24-2.

Further, the RWM clear specification command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear process, and the power-on specification command is transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process. However, the RWM clear start specification command is transmitted instead of the RWM clear specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clear end specification command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S26-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is in the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process is moved to step S26-2, and the set value is not in the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). If so, the process is transferred to step S26-8.

In step S26-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. As a result, processing for receiving the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

In step S26-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" is to display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the image display device, or to emit a predetermined amount of light while confirming the setting of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. It is to turn on all lights with a color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“confirming the set value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S26-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating a set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S26-5 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S26-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S26-5 is repeated.

In step S26-6, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113, and in step S26-7, the setting confirmation signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Ends the output of. As a result, processing for ending the reception of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like). When this process is completed, the setting confirmation process this time is completed.

After that, in step S29 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and a process for ending the setting confirmation notification and executing the power restoration notification is performed. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing in step S26-8. Specifically, after displaying the set value error information on the information display 113 and transmitting the non-recoverable error specification command indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130, the timer interrupt is prohibited. After interrupting is prohibited and the output port is cleared, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the power supply is completely cut off. The process of waiting until is executed.

In this way, when the set value is not within the appropriate range, the progress of the game is stopped. The non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the gaming machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the inconvenience to the amusement shop and the player.

In addition, the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 immediately after the setting confirmation process is started, and the output of the setting confirmation signal is terminated immediately before the setting confirmation process is completed. Therefore, it is possible to know that the processing related to security (setting confirmation) has started and ended on the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer), which can be useful for finding fraudulent activities. Become.

Further, during the setting confirmation process (display of the screen during setting change), input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, Monitors the presence or absence of signal input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a). It is designed not to be done.

That is, the occurrence of winning (winning) of a game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53). Even if a prize is generated during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting changing screen) because it is not monitored (detected) (the payout number specification command described later is not sent to the payout control board 120), the prize is invalid. As a result, the game balls are not paid out. In addition, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (the error specification command is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), error notification is performed based on the occurrence of an error during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting changing screen). Is not done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent act will be performed by the player while the setting is being confirmed.

When it is determined in step S26-1 that the set value is not in the proper range, the initial value "1" is set in the set value and the process in step S26-2 is performed instead of shifting to the non-recoverable error process. You may want to migrate.

In addition, the setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the setting confirmation process is completed. However, the setting confirmation start specification command is sent instead of the setting confirmation specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the setting confirmation end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, and the setting confirmation signal are transmitted from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Security signals such as are output, but these signals may be output from separate output terminals.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, a security signal is output from the start of the process to the end of the process. The security signal may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) at the timing of.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a) , 1st starting port detection switch 45a, 2nd starting port detection switch 47a, 1st big winning opening detection switch 50a, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a ) Is not monitored for the presence or absence of signal input, but it may be monitored. In this case, only the presence or absence of signal input from the input device may be monitored, or the signal input of only a specific input device related to security such as the magnetic detection sensor 55a and the radio wave detection sensor 56a may be monitored. When there is an input, the error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main RAM initialization trigger and initialization area)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initialization trigger of the main RAM 110c and the initialization area.

As shown in FIG. 24, the initialization trigger of the main RAM 110c may be a case where the setting change process is executed or a case where the RWM clear process is executed. In the setting change process, the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is normal. In some cases, the RWM area of the main RAM 110c may be abnormal.

In the game RWM area, a set value area in which the set value is stored, a judgment information area in which the checksum of the main RAM 110c is stored, a game data area in which data related to the progress of the game is stored, and data are stored. A stack area for saving and an unused area in which no data is stored are provided.

The information RWM area stores a performance information area in which information related to the performance of the game machine 1 (count value of a game ball described later, a normal base value described later) is stored, and information used for determining various errors. An error information area, a stack area for saving data, and an unused area in which no data is stored are provided.

If the initialization trigger is the setting change process and the RWM area is abnormal, the area other than the set value area is initialized (cleared to 0). On the other hand, when the initialization trigger is the setting change process and the RWM area is not abnormal, or when the initialization trigger is the RWM clear process, other than the stack area of the set value area, the performance information area, and the information RWM area. Area is initialized (cleared to 0).

Although the performance information area and the error information area are provided in the information RWM area, at least one of them may be provided in the game RWM area. Even in this case, the performance information area and the error information area are initialized. The relationship between the trigger and the area to be initialized should be the same as described above. For example, when the error information area is provided in the game RWM area, the game RWM area is initialized when the setting change process or the RWM clear process is executed, but the information RWM area is not initialized.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt process, a clock pulse is input every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 after the initial setting process of the main process is completed. Is executed by.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area in step S100, and performs the time control process in step S110. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as a stop time of a special symbol and an opening time of a special electric accessory.

The main CPU 110a performs the specific random number value update process in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for jackpot judgment, the random number value for special symbol judgment, the random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the random number value for hit judgment, the random number value for normal symbol judgment, and the random number value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new lap initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process in step S130. Specifically, in the same manner as in step S30, the process of updating the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the input control process in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 53a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs the special figure special electric control process. Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the large winning opening. Processing such as opening / closing (first prize opening 50, second prize 53) and setting the game state is performed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the normal drawing control processing. Specifically, processing such as determination of the acquired normal map determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44, variation display of the normal symbol, opening / closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like is performed.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal diagram and the normal symbol, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, referring to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second) A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the large winning opening 53) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes the process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs the data creation process in step S600. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, start port opening / closing data output to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second large winning Large prize opening / closing data output to the mouth opening / closing solenoid 54b, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first 1 Performs a process of creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (information program) in step S720. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error, which will be described later) have occurred, and an error specification command corresponding to the generated error. Is processed to be transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes the process for performing the error notification.

In step S740, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of payouts (the number of payout balls) to be paid out by winning the game balls to various winning openings and the number of outs (the number of out balls fired into the game area) discharged from the game area 5a. ) Etc. are counted (collected). The details of the game ball counting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program) in step S760. Specifically, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated from the number of payouts (number of payout balls) and the number of outs (number of out balls) counted (collected) in the game ball counting process. The details of the performance information calculation process will be described later.

In step S770, the main CPU 110a performs the performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, a process of setting performance display data for displaying the performance information calculated by the performance information calculation process on the information display 113 is performed. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In step S790, the main CPU 110a performs the game program return processing. Specifically, the process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the output control process in step S800. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as external output data, start opening opening / closing data, and winning opening opening / closing data created in step S600, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol hold display. It is set in the display output process for outputting signals such as data, normal symbol hold display data, and performance display data (performance information) set in step S770 to various indicators, and in the transmission data storage area for payout of the main RAM 110c. The payout command transmission process of transmitting the command to the payout control board 120 and the effect command transmission process of transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are executed. Perform processing.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode, the number of payouts and the number of outs are counted, and the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated. Since the performance information of the gaming machine is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the general winning opening detection switch input process in step S210. Specifically, for determining whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and paying out the winning ball from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, has the detection signal been input from the first prize opening detection switch 50a or the second prize opening detection switch 53a, that is, the game ball has won the first prize opening 50 or the second prize opening 53. It is determined whether or not the prize ball has been paid out, and a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal map gate 44, and acquiring and storing the normal map determination information. I do.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process shifts to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the three prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is less than 4. If the number of 1st special figure reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of 1st special figure reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port of this time. The detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special figure hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the first special figure hold number. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to (U1) is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S230-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving game state is in progress. If it is in the non-time-saving game state, the process is transferred to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving game state, the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 14 is referred to, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is pre-judged before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-judgment (special). The first start port winning designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the planned variation pattern) is generated.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start port winning designation command generated in step S230-9 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first start opening prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command is first started. Pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that expects the jackpot game to be executed over one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the mouth prize designation command is started. ) Can be executed.

As for the second start port detection switch input process, the same process as the first start port detection switch input process is performed. Therefore, the first start port detection switch 45a, three prize ball counters, and the number of the first special figure reserved. (U1), 1st special figure judgment information hold storage area, non-time saving game state, 1st pre-judgment processing, 1st start opening winning designation command part, 2nd starting opening detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counters, It may be read as the second special figure hold number (U2), the second special figure determination information hold storage area, the time saving game state, the second pre-judgment process, and the second start opening winning designation command.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved second special figures (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved second special figures may be smaller than the upper limit of the number of reserved special figures of the first. Further, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage unit of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric control process is completed.

Specifically, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold storage is executed, and the special symbol special electric processing data = If it is 1, the special symbol variation process (step S320) for stopping and displaying the special symbol is executed according to the elapse of the variation time, and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the stop time elapses and the stopped special symbol is executed. The special symbol stop process (step S330) for shifting the process to the big hit game or the small hit game is executed according to the type of, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the big hit game for executing the big hit game is executed. If the process (step S340) is executed and the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the big hit game end process (step S350) for ending the big hit game is executed, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 5, then the special figure special electric processing data = 5. The small hit game process (step S360) for executing the small hit game is executed. The details of each process will be described later.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. ..

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process is moved to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the number of 2nd special figure reservations (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the number of 2nd special figure reservations (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S310-4. To move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the second special figure hold number (U2) and updates it, and in step S310-6, it corresponds to the second special figure hold number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, in the second special figure determination information storage area. The stored data is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure judgment information used in the previous game that has been played is deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of 1st special figure reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-5, and if the number of 1st special figure reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S319-1. To move.

The main CPU 110a updates by subtracting "1" from the first special figure hold number (U1) in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the subtracted first special figure hold number (U1). The symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol hold storage area. The shift processing of the generated data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The special figure judgment information used in the previous game is deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the subtracted first special figure hold number (U1) and the second special figure hold number (U2) is displayed in the main RAM 110c. Set in the specified area of. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reserved storage area and shifted (the second special figure reserved number is set to the second). Although it was decided to subtract the number of special figure reservations in preference to the number of special figure reservations), the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is set in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. It may be shifted (the number of the first special figure reserved and the number of the second special figure reserved are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is prioritized over the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. (The number of reserved first special figures may be subtracted in preference to the number of reserved second special figures).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot judgment process. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output by the output control process of the step S800. The special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will perform variable display of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. To do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol memory determination process this time is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. The customer waiting state means a state in which the special symbol variation display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is in the customer waiting state is used to produce the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for executing the customer waiting effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the set value stored in the game RWM area, and in step S311-2, selects the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage area, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is shifted from the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, FIG. 10 (a) ) Is selected, and if the table is shifted from the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area, the jackpot for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (b) is selected. Select the judgment table.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current probability game state and the jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. If the jackpot is won, the process is transferred to step S311-4, and if the jackpot is not won, the process is transferred to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the winning state data (any of 00H to 02H) according to the current gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, FIG. 11 (a). ) Is selected, and the process is transferred to steps S311-9.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the current stochastic game state and the random value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a small hit has been won. If the small hit is won, the process is transferred to step S311-7, and if the small hit is not won, the process is transferred to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 11 (c), and shifts the process to step S311-9.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for loss shown in FIG. 11B, and shifts the process to step S311-9.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random value for special symbol determination for which the jackpot determination (lottery) is to be performed with the special symbol determination table. Then, the special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the jackpot determination process this time.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving game state is present. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process is transferred to step S313-2, and if it is not in the non-time saving game state, the process is transferred to step S313-3.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 12, and shifts the process to step S311-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 13, and shifts the process to step S310-7-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a collates the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, the random value for the reach determination, and the random value for the special figure variation pattern determination with the special figure variation pattern determination table, and the special figure variation. Determine the pattern.

The main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S313-5 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the special figure variation corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in step S313-6. The pattern specification command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process this time is completed. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S315 has elapsed. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is shifted to step S320-2 to stop the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and when the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the variation display of the special symbol is continued. This special symbol change processing is completed.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a sets the data for stopping and displaying the special symbol corresponding to the stop special symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and stops and displays the special symbol. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol determination command corresponding to the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for stopping and displaying the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-5, sets "2" to the special figure special electric processing data. Set and finish this special symbol change processing.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320-4 has elapsed. When the stop time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S330-2, and when the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated in order to continue the stop display of the special symbol.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time saving game flag indicating that the time saving game state is set is set in the main RAM 110c, the time saving number (J) stored in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by 1, and the time saving number is "0". If is, the process is terminated after shifting to the non-time-saving game state by clearing the time-saving game flag.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game end determination process in step S330-3. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the high-probability gaming state is set, the high-probability number of times (X) stored in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by 1 to obtain the high-probability number of times. When (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared to shift to the low-probability game state, and then the process ends.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the game state grasped by the effect control board 130 and updating the effect mode is performed.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-6, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-9.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a prepares to set "3" in the special figure special electric processing data and shift the processing to the jackpot game processing, and in step S330-7, the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 110c. , High probability game flag, time saving number of times (J) and high probability number of times (X) are cleared to shift to the low probability non-time saving game state.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start preparation setting process. Specifically, the type of jackpot game corresponding to the stop special figure data is determined from the jackpot opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the control data corresponding to the type of jackpot game is specified.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small hit special symbol. If it is a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-10, and if it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-14.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets "5" in the special figure special electric processing data and prepares to move the processing to the small hit game processing, and in step S330-11, performs the small hit start preparation setting processing. Specifically, the control data for the small hit game is specified.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of the big hit game or the small hit game in the transmission data storage area for production, and in step S330-13, sets the type of the big hit game or the small hit game. The corresponding opening time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol stop processing this time is completed. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game is performed.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process, and ends the special symbol stop process this time.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S340-1 whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is "0". If it is currently opening, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is not currently opening, the process is transferred to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-10 has elapsed. It is determined that the opening time has passed. When the opening time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-3. If the opening time has not passed, the jackpot game process this time is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start setting process in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stored. Here, since the round game has not been performed even once, the number of round games (R) becomes "1".

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the main RAM 110c to update. Further, in order to open the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 or the second winning opening opening / closing member 54, energization data for energizing the first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b is set. At the same time, the opening time of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K).

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the round game effect according to the number of rounds is performed.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending referred to here is a process after all the preset round games are completed. Therefore, if it is currently ending, the process is transferred to step S340-18, and if it is not currently ending, the process is transferred to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b is set. As a result, if it is determined that the large winning opening is closed, the process is transferred to step S340-8, and if it is determined that the large winning opening is not closed, the process is transferred to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in step S340-10, which will be described later, has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the jackpot game process of this time is completed in order to maintain the closure of the big winning opening, and if the closing time has passed, the big winning opening is opened in step S340-4. Move the process.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, whether or not the number of balls entered in the large winning opening (C), which is the number of balls entered in the large winning opening, has reached the specified number (9), or once in the number of openings (K). It is determined whether or not the opening time has passed. If the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and if the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b in order to close the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 or the second winning opening opening / closing member 54. Is cleared, and the closing time of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K).

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has been completed. When one round game is completed, the process is moved to step S340-12, and when one round game is not completed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of times of opening (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and the number of balls entered in the large winning opening (C) is cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is the maximum value. If the number of round games (R) is the maximum value, the process is transferred to step S340-15, and if the number of round games (R) is not the maximum value, the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stores the game, and ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, sets the ending designation command in the production transmission data storage area in step S340-16, and steps S340-. In 17, the ending time according to the type of the jackpot game is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the current jackpot game process is completed. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S340-17 has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-19, "4" is set in the special figure special electric processing data to prepare for moving to the jackpot game end processing, and if the ending time has not elapsed, this time. End the jackpot game process.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process on the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data and the winning state data stored in the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs a process of whether or not to set the high probability flag based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", a high probability flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a sets a high probability number (X) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data with reference to the game state setting table shown in FIG. To do. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", 50,000 times are set as the high probability number (X).

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs a process of whether or not to set the time saving game flag based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", the time saving game flag is not set if the winning state data is 00H, but the time saving game flag is set if the winning state data is 01H or 02H.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets the time reduction number (J) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data with reference to the game state setting table shown in FIG. .. For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", if the winning state data is 00H, 0 times is set as the time saving number (J), and if the winning state data is 01H or 02H, the time saving number (J). Set 100 times as.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the high probability flag and the time saving game flag in the transmission data storage area for production, and in step S350-7, the special figure special electric processing. The data is set to 0 to prepare for moving to the special symbol memory determination process, and the current jackpot game end process is completed.

(Abnormality judgment processing of main control board)
The abnormality determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process (information program) on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the game stack pointer to the information RWM area in step S721, sets the information stack pointer in step S722, and saves the register to the information RWM area in step S723.

In step S724, the main CPU 110a performs an illegal winning error determination process. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 when the auxiliary game is not in progress, and when the game ball wins the big prize opening when the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not in progress. In addition, the illegal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that an illegal winning error has occurred. As a result, the illegal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the illegal winning error notification (displaying the illegal winning error image on the image display device, outputting the illegal winning error sound) is performed. It will be.

In step S725, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormal winning error determination process. Specifically, the number of game balls and winning balls that have won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first major winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53) are displayed. When the number of game balls discharged from the flow-down winning ball flow path does not match, the abnormal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that an abnormal winning error has occurred. As a result, the abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the abnormal winning error notification (displaying the abnormal winning error image on the image display device, outputting the abnormal winning error sound) is performed. It will be.

The main CPU 110a performs the magnetic error determination process in step S726. Specifically, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 55a over a predetermined period, a magnetic error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that a magnetic error has occurred. As a result, the magnetic error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing magnetic error notification (display of the magnetic error image on the image display device, output of the magnetic error sound) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs radio wave error determination processing in step S727. Specifically, when an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 56a for a predetermined period, a radio wave error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that a radio wave error has occurred. As a result, the radio wave error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the radio wave error notification (display of the radio wave error image on the image display device, output of the radio wave error sound) is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the door opening error determination process in step S728. Specifically, when the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the door open error start specification command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that a door open error has occurred, and the open detection switch 31a is turned OFF from the ON state. When the state is reached, the door open error end specification command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c assuming that the door open error has been cleared. As a result, the door opening error start designation command and the door opening error end designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the door opening error notification (display of the door opening error image on the image display device, output of the door opening error sound) is sent. Processing to execute will be performed.

In step S729, the main CPU 110a performs the operation error determination process and ends the current abnormality determination process. Specifically, an operation error occurs when the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the initial setting process of step S10 described above is completed). As a result, the operation error specification command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the operation error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the operation error notification (display of the operation error image on the image display device, output of the operation error sound) is performed. The details of the operation error determination process will be described later.

In this way, while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the initial setting process of step S10 described above is completed), it is determined whether or not various errors (abnormalities) have occurred, and the errors have occurred. In this case, since the process for causing the error notification is performed, it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, by executing the abnormality determination process in the performance program, it is possible to separate the functions of the game program (program related to the progress control of the game) and the performance program (program not related to the progress control of the game). , The program design can be facilitated, and it becomes possible to contribute to the creation of a more interesting game program.

In the abnormality determination process, the operation error determination process for determining an illegal operation of the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is executed, but the operation error determination process may not be executed.

(Operation error judgment processing of the main control board)
The operation error determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an operation error determination process (performance program) on the main control board.

First, in step S729-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. When the state changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the process is moved to step S729-2 as if a setting key error, which is one of the operation errors, has occurred without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the process is turned OFF. If it is not in the ON state from the state, the process is moved to step S729-3.

In step S729-2, the main CPU 110a sets the setting key error start designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the setting key error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for starting the setting key error notification is performed.

In step S729-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. When the ON state is changed to the OFF state, the process is transferred to step S729-4 assuming that the setting key error has been cleared, and when the ON state is not changed to the OFF state, the process is performed in step S729-5. Transfer.

In step S729-4, the main CPU 110a sets the setting key error end specification command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the setting key error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for ending the setting key error notification is performed.

In step S729-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If it is in the ON state, the process is moved to step S729-6 as there is a possibility of a clear switch error, which is one of the operation errors, without shifting to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, and the process is not in the ON state. If it is in the OFF state, the process is moved to step S729-9.

In step S729-6, the main CPU 110a updates the continuation counter for monitoring the period during which the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state by +1. In step S729-7, the continuation counter is set to a specified value (for example, 10). Is determined. If it is a specified value, the process is moved to step S729-8 assuming that a clear switch error has occurred, and if it is not a specified value, the current operation error determination process is terminated. The continuation counter is set in the information RWM.

In step S729-8, the main CPU 110a sets the clear switch error designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the clear switch error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the clear switch error notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

In step S729-9, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) the continuation counter to 0, and ends the operation error determination process this time.

In this way, while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the initial setting process of step S10 described above is completed), the operations of the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are monitored and operated. In this case, the operation error notification (setting key error notification, clear switch error notification) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal operation on the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a.

Further, while the progress control of the game is being performed, even if the setting key switch 112a is operated, the mode does not shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, so that the progress control of the game is not hindered and the game is played. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as unstable progress.

Further, while the progress control of the game is being performed, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the mode does not shift to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, so that the progress control of the game is not hindered and the game is played. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as unstable progress.

When a setting key error occurs, the setting key error notification is executed from the ON state to the OFF state of the setting key switch 112a, but the setting key error notification may be continued until the power is turned off. In this way, it becomes easy to detect an illegal operation, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an illegal act.

Further, when a clear switch error occurs, the clear switch error notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), but it may be continued until the power is turned off. In this way, it becomes easy to detect an illegal operation, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an illegal act.

Further, while the setting key error notification or the clear switch error notification is being executed, the occurrence of the clear switch error is not determined, and the RWM clear switch 111a is set to be operated (from the OFF state to the ON state). The key error notification and the clear switch error notification may be terminated.

Further, although both the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are monitored targets, the operation error notification may be performed by targeting only one of them as the monitoring target.

(Game ball counting process on the main control board)
The game ball counting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a game ball counting process (information program) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S741, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state. If the player is in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to step S742 to count the number of payouts in the normal game state, and if the player is not in the normal game state, the number of payouts in the normal game is not counted. As a result, the process is transferred to step S750.

In step S742, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won in the general winning opening 43, and the process is moved to step S744. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is moved to the general winning opening 43. In step S743, "5", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the general winning opening 43, is added to the normal payout number counter for counting the number of normal payouts. It should be noted that the normal payout number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S744, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first winning opening detection switch 50a or the second winning opening detection switch 53a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won in the big winning opening, and the process is moved to step S746. If the detection signal is input, the game ball wins in the big winning opening. As a result, in step S745, "15", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the large winning opening, is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

The number of payouts (number of prize balls) when a game ball wins in the first large prize opening 50 is 15, and the number of payouts (number of prize balls) when a game ball wins in the second large prize opening 53 is set. The number of payouts corresponding to each major winning opening may be different, such as 10 pieces. In that case, when the detection signal is input from the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, "15", which is the number of payouts (number of winning balls) corresponding to the first large winning opening 50, is displayed in the normal medium payout number counter. When the number is added and the detection signal is input from the second large winning opening detection switch 53a, "10", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the second large winning opening 53, is added to the normal medium payout number counter. Good.

In step S746, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 45a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 45, and the process is transferred to step S748. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is transferred to the first starting port 45. Assuming that the game ball has won a prize, in step S747, "3", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the first starting port 45, is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S748, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 47a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won in the second start port 47, and the process is transferred to step S750. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is transferred to the second start port 47. Assuming that the game ball has won a prize, in step S749, "2", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the second starting port 47, is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the out-ball detection switch 57a. When the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that there is no out ball which is a game ball discharged from the game area 5a, and when the current game ball counting process is finished and the detection signal is input, it is assumed that there is no out ball. Assuming that there was an out ball, in step S751, "1" is added to the total out number counter for counting the out ball (total out number) in all the gaming states. The total out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S752, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state. If it is not in the normal game state, the current game ball counting process is finished, and if it is in the normal game state, in step S753, the number of outs in the normal game state (the number of outs in the normal game) is counted. "1" is added to the normal out number counter to end the game ball counting process this time. The normal medium out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In this way, before the progress control of the game is performed (the initial setting process of step S10 described above), the progress control of the game is performed while the progress control of the game is performed without counting and storing the number of payouts and the number of outs (described above). Since the number of normal payouts, the number of normal middle outs, and the total number of outs, which are game information (history information) in the initial setting process of step S10, are counted and stored, the player can execute the game. It becomes possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) of the gaming machine at that time, and it becomes possible to use it for calculating the performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine.

Even if a game ball wins in the large winning opening due to a small hit game during the normal game state, "15", which is the number of payouts (number of winning balls) corresponding to the large winning opening, is added to the normal medium payout counter. However, if a game ball wins a large prize opening by a small hit game during the normal game state, the number of payouts may not be added to the normal payout number counter.

(Performance information calculation processing of main control board)
The performance information calculation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the performance information calculation process (information program) of the main control board 110.

In the present embodiment, the state in which the power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 is divided into a plurality of gaming sections, and the performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine is displayed. Therefore, first, the game section will be described.

The game section is divided by the total number of outs, and the total number of outs counted from the first power-on or from 0 clear (initialization) of the information RWM area due to a data abnormality is 300. Is the first game section, and after the first game section, the game section is switched every 60,000 total outs, and the second game section, the third game section, the fourth game section ... It becomes N game section.

First, in step S761, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the section counter for counting the number of game sections is the first game section value (0) indicating that it is the first game section. To do. If it is the first game section value, it is assumed that the current is the first game section for which the performance information is not calculated, and the process is moved to step S762. If it is not the first game section value, the current performance information is The process is transferred to step S763, assuming that the game section is the game section after the second game section to be calculated. The section counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S762, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total outs counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If it is equal to or more than the first section update value, the processing is transferred to step S768 as the game section is updated, and if it is not more than the first section update value, the game section is not updated. End the calculation process.

In step S763, the main CPU 110a is based on the number of normal medium payouts in the current game section indicated by the normal medium payout counter and the number of normal medium outs in the current game section indicated by the normal medium out number counter as performance information. The value is calculated and rounded to the first decimal place, and in step S764, the rounded normal base value is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the information RWM area.

The "normal base value" is the amount of game value used for the game during the normal game state (the number of outs, which is the number of game balls fired into or discharged from the game area) during the normal game state. It is the ratio (ratio) of the amount of game value (the number of game balls to be paid out to the player) that is to be given in the game, and is "(the number of payouts in the normal game state). It is calculated by the formula of "the number of medium payouts ÷ the number of outs in the normal game state (the number of normal medium outs) x 100".

The "base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base value in the four game sections, the first area for storing the normal base value in the current game section, and the previous one. To store the second area for storing the normal base value in the game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before. It is composed of the fourth region of.

In step S765, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total outs counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If it is equal to or more than the second section update value, the processing is transferred to step S766 as the game section is updated, and if it is not more than the second section update value, the game section is not updated. End the calculation process.

In addition, the total number of outs is 60,000, which divides the game section after the second game section, and this number of 60,000 is about one day in a game machine that shoots 100 game balls per minute. It is a number that can guarantee the operating portion of. Therefore, the gaming section is updated when the gaming machine operates all day long.

In step S766, the main CPU 110a shifts the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area one by one, and clears the first area of the base storage area to 0 in step S767. As a result, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value in the previous game section, the normal base value in the current game section is reset, and preparations are made to move to the next game section. Be told.

In step S768, the main CPU 110a updates the game section by adding "1" to the section counter, and in step S769, the total number of outs indicated by the above-mentioned total out number counter and the normal medium payout indicated by the normal medium payout counter. The number and the number of normal middle outs indicated by the normal middle out number counter are cleared to 0, a process of shifting to the next game section is performed, and the current performance information calculation process is completed.

By updating the game section according to the total number of outs in this way, it is allowed that there is a state in which different set values are set in one game section. Therefore, it is possible to obtain (store) game information (history information such as the total number of outs, the number of normal outs, the number of normal payouts, etc.) that spans a plurality of set values in one game section, and the setting change is hindered. It is possible to calculate performance information (usually base value) without having to.

In addition, since the normal base value (a type of history information) is calculated and stored as performance information for each game section from the number of normal outs and the number of normal payouts for each game section, the gaming machine It is possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance.

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of normal outs, and the number of normal outs are set values because they are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). Performance information (usually the base value) excluding the influence of the above can be calculated, stored, and displayed, which can be useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, by not calculating the normal base value in the first game section, operation confirmation in the pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine (operation confirmation of various winning openings detection switch and out ball detection switch by launching and caring for the game ball) ) Will no longer provide unreliable information, and it will be possible to avoid inconveniences such as misleading the actual performance of the gaming machine.

In addition, after the second gaming section, by calculating the normal base value, it is possible to display a highly credible normal base value that eliminates the influence of pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine, and the actual performance of the gaming machine can be displayed. It is possible to provide highly credible information for accurate grasping.

In addition, every time the performance information calculation process is executed (every 4 milliseconds), the normal base value is calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area, but the normal base value in the current game section Is displayed on the information display 113 (every 20 seconds), the normal base value in the current game section may be calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area.

In addition, in the first game section, the number of normal payouts and the number of normal middle outs are counted even though the normal base value is not calculated, but the number of normal middle payouts and the number of normal middle outs should not be counted. It may be.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process (information program) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S771, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the display switching time counter for determining whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is the display switching value (0). If it is a display switching value, the process is transferred to step S772 to switch the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113, and if it is not the display switching value, it is displayed on the information display 113. The process is moved to step S776 assuming that the performance information is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value. Further, the display switching time counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S772, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmed flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is moved to step S774 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information display 113 is displayed. The process is moved to step S773 to confirm the lighting of. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 773, the main CPU 110a provides display data for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. The determination is made, and the process is transferred to step S776.

In step S774, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for displaying on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is stored. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired. The data selection counter value will be updated in step S782, which will be described later.

In step S775, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value, the information display 113a The display data of the normal base value to be displayed in is determined, and the process is moved to step S776.

In step S776, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process (game program) of step S800 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is information. It will be displayed on the display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S777, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned display switching time counter, and in step S778, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is moved to step S785. If it is larger than the upper limit value, it is displayed on the information display 113. Assuming that the time for switching the performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S779.

In step S780, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is moved to step S782, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S781, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area and the process is moved to step S785. ..

In step S782, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S783, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S785, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S784, and the process is moved to step S785.

In step S785, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area in step S723 described above, and in step S786, returns the game stack pointer saved in the information RWM area in step S721. The display data setting process ends.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the table of display information of FIG. 41, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2." Indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal medium outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of outs in normal is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment includes the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information of "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the two 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed in the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it becomes easy to grasp that the normally displayed base value currently displayed is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed in the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50 and the second major winning opening 53, and the out opening 39 by the out ball detection switch 57a. Instead of detecting the out ball composed of the game balls that have flowed into the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 57a. In that case, the out ball detection switch 57a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first major winning opening detection switch 50a, the second major winning opening detection switch. Every time the game ball is detected by 53a, the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) may be added by one.

(Display example of information display)
Next, display examples 1 to 7 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48.

(Display example of information display 1)
A display example 1 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display example when the setting is changed when the power is turned on for the first time.

First, when the power is turned on for the first time, the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting change operation is not performed, an unrecoverable error occurs due to a checksum error, and error information "Er.FF" indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the power is turned on. The error information display continues until it is turned off.

On the other hand, when the setting change operation is performed, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, the provisional setting value "1" is displayed on the information display 113, and the information display is displayed every time the setting value update operation is performed. The setting value displayed on 113 is updated from "1" → "2" → "3". When the setting value confirmation operation is performed in that state, the setting value "3" displayed on the information display 113 immediately before is confirmed, saved in the setting value area of the game RWM, and displayed on the information display 113. The set value "3" is deleted and the setting change mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed during normal control. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. ..

In this way, when the set value is displayed on the information display 113, the set value is displayed because it is displayed on the numerical segment of the information display 113 in the same manner as when the numerical value of the normal base value is displayed. Can be easily recognized.

In addition, when displaying a set value consisting of a one-digit numerical value, unlike the case of displaying the numerical value of the normal base value, it is displayed without adding "0" to the tens digit, so that it is the numerical value of the normal base value. It is less likely to be confused, and it becomes possible to easily recognize that the display is a set value.

Further, when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time (the setting value is not saved), the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that the setting value is set. It is possible to make it easier to recognize what must be done.

When displaying the set value, it is not displayed on the 7-segment display 113d indicating the 1st place of the numerical segment, but on any one of the other 7-segment displays 113a to 113c of the information display 113. It may be displayed, or the set value may be displayed on two or more 7-segment displays of the information display 113.

Further, when displaying the set value, the identification information (for example, "St.") indicating that the set value is set may be displayed in the identification segment, and the set value may be displayed in the numerical segment. In that case, the set value may be displayed in the ones place of the numerical segment, or the set value may be displayed in the tens place.

Further, instead of displaying the set value only on the information display 113, a special symbol display or a normal symbol display that can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine 1 is configured with a 7-segment display to display the special symbol. The set value may be displayed on either the device or the normal symbol display.

(Display example 2 of information display)
A display example 2 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display example when the RWM is cleared when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

First, when the power is turned on (power supply), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the RWM clear operation is performed, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode, but when the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is not within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). The error information "Er.FF" indicating the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113 as an unrecoverable error due to an abnormal setting value, and the error information display continues until the power is turned off. ..

On the other hand, if the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the appropriate range (1 to 4 in this case), the information display 113 is in a state of waiting for a clear confirmation operation. Is not displayed, and the RWM clear mode ends when the clear confirmation operation is performed.

After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed during normal control. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. ..

In this way, in the RWM clear mode when the set value is normal, no information (for example, the set value or performance information) is displayed on the information display 113, so that a fraudulent act such as shifting to the RWM clear mode is performed. Even if it is damaged, the information that the game store wants to keep secret will not be leaked, and the security of the game machine can be improved.

Further, when the set value is abnormal, since the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, it is possible to easily recognize that the set value must be set.

(Display example of information display 3)
A display example 3 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display example when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

First, when the power is turned on (power is turned on again), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting confirmation operation is performed, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, but if the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is not within the appropriate range (1 to 4), the setting confirmation operation is performed. , An unrecoverable error occurs due to an abnormality in the set value, and the error information "Er.FF" indicating the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the error information display continues until the power is turned off.

On the other hand, when the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the appropriate range (1 to 4), the current set value (here, "1") is displayed on the information display 113. , The state of waiting for the confirmation end operation is entered, and when the confirmation end operation is performed, the set value "1" displayed on the information display 113 is erased and the setting confirmation mode ends.

After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed during normal control. At this time, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit, and this state continues for 5 seconds. ..

In this way, when the set value is abnormal, the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the set value must be set. ..

(Display example 4 of information display)
A display example 4 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display example when the first game section is started by shifting to the progress control of the game.

When the progress control of the game is started and the normal control is in progress, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) are lit. , This state will continue for 5 seconds.

After that, when the lighting confirmation is completed, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Is displayed blinking in the identification segment, indicating that it is the current game section, and "---" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. Is lit and displayed.

In addition, the blinking display of the identification segment when the base value is normally displayed in the blinking display mode is a blinking display with a cycle of 0.6 seconds that repeats turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds. The same applies to the blinking display of the identification segment that appears in the following description.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Is displayed blinking in the identification segment, indicating that it is the previous game section, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicates that the game section is the game section two times before is blinked in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is three times before, is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the first game section becomes 300 and the first game section ends, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is displayed. It will be switched in order every time the switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

In this way, in order to confirm the lighting of the information display 113 for a predetermined period (5 seconds) before displaying the normal base values in each game section in order, is each segment of the information display 113 out of order? Whether or not it can be confirmed, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misidentifying the numerical value when the normal base value is displayed after that.

Further, since the time for confirming the lighting and the time for displaying the normal base value in each game section are the same, it is possible to easily recognize the idling period before displaying the normal base value.

In addition, since the normal base value is not displayed in the first game section because there is no normal base value to be calculated, the normal base value with low credibility is displayed after that (after the second game section). It is possible to improve the reliability of the displayed normal base value.

Further, regarding the display of a plurality of game sections having no calculated normal base value, "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value is commonly displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113. , It becomes possible to easily recognize that there is no calculated normal base value.

(Display example 5 of information display)
A display example 5 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display example when switching from the first game section to the second game section.

First, in the first game section, the information display 113 displays the normal base value in the game section two times before in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicates that the game section is the game section two times before is blinked in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

After that, if the total number of outs in the first game section reaches 300 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the first game section ends and the second game section starts, but the display switching time Until a certain 5 seconds have passed, the display of the normal base value up to that point is continued.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is three times before, is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is blinking and displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "23" is lit and displayed on the numerical segment. To.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Is displayed blinking in the identification segment, indicating that it is the previous game section, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicates that the game section is the game section two times before is blinked in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section reaches 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is the display switching time of 5 seconds. It will switch in order each time it elapses.

In this way, even if the game section is switched while the normal base value of the predetermined game section is displayed, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. , The display of the normal base value does not end halfway due to the switching of the game section, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as difficulty in recognizing the normal base value.

In addition, even if the game section is switched, the display order up to that point is inherited instead of starting from the display of the normal base value of the current game section (for example, the normal base of the game section two times before). If the game section is switched while the value is being displayed, the normal base value displayed next will be the normal base value of the game section three times before), so the normal base value in each game section will be changed by switching the game section. The display order does not change suddenly, and it is possible to easily recognize the normal base value of each game section.

(Display example of information display 6)
A display example 6 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example when the display mode of the normal base value of the current game section is switched during the second game section.

First, in the second game section, the information display 113 displays the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is blinking and displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is lit and displayed on the numerical segment. To.

After that, if the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 6000 or more before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, a highly credible normal base value can be calculated, and the display mode of the normal base value can be changed. Although the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the base value is usually displayed in the blinking display mode until 5 seconds, which is the display switching time, elapses.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Is displayed blinking in the identification segment, indicating that it is the previous game section, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before (here, before the game section occurs) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicates that the game section is the game section two times before is blinked in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before (here, before the game section occurs) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the fourth identification information "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is three times before, is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in the lighting display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL.", Which indicates that it is the current game section, is lit and displayed on the identification seg, and "36", which is the calculated normal base value, is lit and displayed on the numerical seg. To.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section becomes 60,000 and the third game section is reached, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is switched. It will switch in order every time the time of 5 seconds elapses.

In this way, when it becomes possible to display a credible normal base value, the display mode of the target normal base value (display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment) is switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize whether the normal base value is credible or the normal base value is not credible.

Further, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, the blinking display mode is continued until the display switching time elapses. Therefore, the same normal base value is not displayed in a plurality of display modes within the display switching time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as difficulty in recognizing the normal base value.

(Display example of information display 7)
A display example 7 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display example when switching from the second game section to the third game section.

First, in the second game section, the information display 113 displays the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) in the lighting display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL.", Which indicates that it is the current game section, is lit and displayed on the identification seg, and "36", which is the calculated normal base value, is lit and displayed on the numerical seg. To.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Is displayed blinking in the identification segment, indicating that it is the previous game section, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Then, if the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 60,000 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the second game section ends and the third game section starts, and the normal base in each game section is started. The condition for switching the display of the value is satisfied, but the display of the normal base value up to that point is continued until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section (here, the first game section) two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicates that the game section is the game section two times before is blinked in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the fourth identification information "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is three times before, is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the numerical segment does not have the calculated normal base value. -”Is lit and displayed.

Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the third game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is blinking and displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "08" is lit and displayed on the numerical segment. To.

Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the information display 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the second game section) in the lighting display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1.", Which indicates that it is the previous game section, is lit and displayed on the identification seg, and the calculated normal base value "36" is lit on the numerical seg. Is displayed.

After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the third game section reaches 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is the display switching time of 5 seconds. It will switch in order each time it elapses.

In this way, when displaying the normal base value of the game section in which the calculation result of the normal base value is no longer likely to change, the lighting display mode is the same as the display mode when displaying the credible normal base value. Since it is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize that the calculation result of the normal base value is no longer likely to change.

In the present embodiment, the total number of outs in the first game section is set to 300, but if the value is less than the total number of outs after the second game section of 60,000, it is less than 300. It may be more or less. In addition, the total number of outs after the second game section may be more or less than 60,000.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the information RWM area is cleared (initialized) to 0 due to a data abnormality, the game starts again from the first game section, but it is assumed that there is no first game section. 2 You may start from the game section.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game section is switched during the display of the predetermined normal base value, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses, and the normal base value is displayed. The display order is also inherited, but when the game section is switched, it may start from the display of the normal base value of the current game section, or after the display switching time has elapsed, the current game section may be displayed. You may usually start by displaying the base value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the normal base value blinks until the display switching time elapses. Although the display mode is continued, the display mode may be switched to the lighting display mode immediately when the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal base values in each game section are sequentially displayed without an interval period (non-display period), but they are sequentially displayed with an interval period of a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in between. It may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (when the progress control of the game becomes possible), the lighting of the information display 113 is always confirmed. However, the lighting confirmation may not be performed after at least one of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process for displaying the set value on the information display 113 is completed, or the setting change process and the setting may be performed. When the confirmation process is performed, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting of the information display 113 is confirmed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (when the progress control of the game becomes possible). However, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, the lighting confirmation may be performed before the setting value is displayed during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on for the first time (the set value is not saved) or when the set value saved when the power is turned on for the second time or later is abnormal, an unrecoverable error occurs and error information However, the error information displayed on the information display 113 may be different between the former case and the latter case.

(Main processing of payout control unit)
The main process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the payout control unit 121. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the payout CPU 121a.

First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts in step H1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of a built-in register in step H2, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H3.

The payout CPU 121a initializes (clears 0) all the RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the payout RAM 121c in step H4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step H6, all interrupts are permitted.

In step H7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not a power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when a power outage occurs has been received. When the power cutoff designation command is received, the process is moved to step H8, and when the power cutoff designation command is not received, the process of step H7 is repeatedly executed.

In step H8, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupts, and in step H9, loads the number of unpaid game balls that have not been paid out from the payout counter of the payout RAM 121c, and in step H10. , A command for specifying the number of remaining payouts according to the number of unpaid payouts loaded is transmitted to the main control board 110.

In step H11, the payout CPU 121a clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.), prohibits RWM access in step H12, and thereafter the power supply is completely cut off. Wait until.

(Timer interrupt processing of payout control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the payout control unit will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the payout control unit. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the payout control unit 121.

First, the payout CPU 121a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the payout RWM area in step H100, and performs the timer update process in step H200. Specifically, the drive time of the payout motor 95b. And the process of updating various timer counters such as the interval time provided after the game ball is paid out.

The payout CPU 121a performs a command analysis process in step H300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110) stored in the receive buffer of the payout RWM area is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs an input control process in step H400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the open detection switch 31a, the payout ball detection switch 95a, the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, the lending button detection switch, and the return button detection switch. When there is an input, processing such as setting predetermined data is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs the prize ball control process in step H500. Specifically, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 from the payout device 95 is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs the ball lending control process in step H600. Specifically, when the lending button 20a is operated, one unit of a number of game balls equivalent to 100 yen is performed while performing ball lending communication with a ball lending machine (not shown) juxtaposed with the game machine 1. A process for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The payout CPU 121a performs a firing permission control process in step H700. Specifically, the firing permission flag is saved in the firing permission flag area set in the work area of the payout RAM 121c based on the reception of the firing permission designation command from the main control board 110. In addition, it is determined whether or not the launch permission flag is saved and the launch permission condition that is normally connected to the rental device (so-called ball rental machine) installed in parallel with the game machine 1 is satisfied. If the launch permission condition is satisfied, the launch control unit 122 is permitted to launch the game ball, and if the launch permission condition is not satisfied, the launch control unit 122 is prohibited from launching the game ball. I do.

The payout CPU 121a performs an abnormality determination process in step H750. Specifically, based on the input signals from the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, etc., the occurrence of a dish full error, a ball shortage error, etc. is determined, and a dish full error designation command, a ball shortage error designation command, etc. Is processed to be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The payout CPU 121a performs the data creation process in step H800. Specifically, the external output data output from the game information output terminal board 90 (a prize ball schedule signal output for one pulse each time the condition for paying out 10 game balls is satisfied, and 10 game balls are output. Data creation processing is performed to create data such as a prize ball payout signal (a prize ball payout signal output for one pulse each time payout) and drive data for driving the payout motor 95b.

The payout CPU 121a performs an output control process in step H900. Specifically, a process of outputting signals such as external output data and drive data created in step H800, a process of outputting various commands set in step H750 to the effect control board 130, and the like are performed. Instead of directly transmitting a command from the payout control unit 121 to the effect control board 130, the payout control unit 121 transmits a command to the main control board 110, and this command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. It may be done.

In step H1000, the payout CPU 121a returns the information saved in step H100 to the register of the payout CPU 121a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, when the payout control unit 121 receives the launch permission designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and is normally connected to the lending device juxtaposed with the gaming machine 1, the launch control unit 121 controls the launch. During execution of the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game (for example, in the setting change mode, in the RWM clear mode, in the setting confirmation mode) in order to allow the unit 122 to launch the game ball. Even if there is, it is possible to launch the game ball by the launching device 26.

Further, since the payout control unit 121 executes the prize ball control process and the ball lending control process regardless of the control state of the main control board 110, the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game Even during execution (for example, in the setting change mode, in the RWM clear mode, in the setting confirmation mode), it is possible to pay out the game ball.

Specifically, since the prize balls are paid out based on the reception of the payout number designation command from the main control board 110, the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. It is virtually impossible to pay out the prize balls during the execution of.

On the other hand, the payout of the ball is not based on the reception of the command from the main control board 110, but is based on the result of the lending communication with the lending device based on the operation of the lending button 20a by the player. Therefore, even during the execution of the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game, it is possible to pay out the ball rental.

If the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game (during the execution of the initial setting process), the launch control unit 122 may prohibit the launch of the game ball. In this case, when the main control board 110 is controlling the progress of the game (for example, the payout control process of step S500 of the timer interrupt process after the end of the initial setting process), the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c It is preferable to set the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 so that the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the output control process of the subsequent step S800.

Further, when the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game (during the execution of the initial setting process), the payout of the game ball (at least one of the prize ball and the rental ball) may be prohibited. Good. In this case, the payout of the game ball is prohibited until the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received from the main control board 110, and when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received from the main control board 110, It is advisable to allow the payout of game balls.

(Modified example of main processing of payout control unit)
A modified example of the main process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main process of the payout control unit 121.

In this modification, it is assumed that the backup power is supplied to the payout RAM 121c, and when the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number area of the payout RAM 121c, and this prize is awarded. It is assumed that the payout control board 120 performs the process related to the payout of the prize balls based on the value in the ball number region. Therefore, even when the power cutoff designation command is received from the main control board 110, the remaining payout number designation command is not transmitted to the main control board 110.

First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts in step H1a, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step H2a, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H3a.

In step H4a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step H5a as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step H7a as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step H5a, the payout CPU 121a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c, and in step H6a, determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c matches the checksum calculated in step H5a. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process is moved to step H8a, and if the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), in step H7a. , Initializes (clear 0) the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

The payout CPU 121a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H8a, and permits all interrupts in step H9a.

In step H10a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. When the power restoration designation command is received (restoring to the control state before the power is turned off), the process is transferred to step H15a, and when the power restoration designation command is not received, the process is transferred to step H11a.

In step H11a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. When the power-on designation command is received (the control state before the power is turned off is not restored), the process is transferred to step H12a, and when the power-on designation command is not received, the process is transferred to step H15a.

In step H12a, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step H13a, clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.), and in step H14a. , The area (including the prize ball number area) other than the firing permission flag area of the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is initialized (cleared to 0).

In step H15a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. If the power cutoff designation command has not been received, the process is moved to step H10a, and if the power cutoff designation command is received, the process is moved to step H16a.

In step H16a, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step H17a, clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.), and in step H18a. , Clear the firing permission flag saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

In step H19a, the payout CPU 121a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H20 and saves it in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step H20a, the payout CPU 121a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is backed up (power recovery) in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c, and prohibits RWM access in step H21a. Process and wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, even if the checksum is abnormal, it is possible to initialize the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c and execute the payout control of the game ball without executing the non-recoverable error processing unlike the main control board 110. Inconvenience that the player suffers a disadvantage because the payout control board 120 does not only control the payout of the game ball even though the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game. Can be avoided.

Further, since the area other than the emission permission flag area of the payout RAM 121c is initialized by receiving the power-on designation command from the main control board 110, the RWM area (prize ball) of the payout RAM 121c is initialized when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. (Including several areas) will also be initialized, and the control state of the main control board 110 and the control state of the payout control board 120 can be aligned, avoiding a situation in which the gaming machine performs an unexpected operation. Is possible.

Similar to the main RAM 110c, the payout RAM 121c controls the payout RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the payout program for performing payout control such as payout of game balls, and information control such as error determination. When it is composed of an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program for execution, and when a power-on designation command is received, a payout RWM area and an information RWM area are received. Both areas will be initialized (cleared to 0).

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130 m. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the sub CPU 130a.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step E5 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step E8 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step E5, the sub CPU 130a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E6, determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c matches the checksum calculated in step E5. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process is moved to step E7, and if the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step E8. Move the process.

In step E7, the sub CPU 130a initializes (reset) an area other than the history information area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power is cut off (power failure) will be inherited even after the power is restored.

In step E8, the sub CPU 130a initializes (reset) the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power is turned off (power failure) will not be inherited after the power is restored.

The sub CPU 130a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E9, permits all interrupts in step E10, and performs a sub random number update process in step E11. I do. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed.

In step E12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. When the power cutoff designation command is received, the process is moved to step E13, and when the power cutoff designation command is not received, the process is moved to step E11.

In step E13, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step E14, clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.).

In step E15, the sub CPU 130a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c and saves it in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step E16, the sub CPU 130a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up (power recovery) in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E17, RWM access is prohibited, and thereafter. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, unlike the payout control unit, the presence / absence of reception of the power-on designation command is not determined and the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is not initialized. Therefore, the setting is changed on the main control board 110. Even when the RWM clear is executed, the game history information can be taken over, and the game history information can be provided to the player for a long period of time.

It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received, and when the power-on designation command is received, the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c may be initialized. Further, only the history information area may be initialized instead of the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130 m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the effect RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs the timer update process in step E200. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary for executing the effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the effect RWM area is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

In step E400, the sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not executed, and the customer. Based on the elapse of the waiting time, a process for executing a customer waiting effect for stimulating the player's motivation to play is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect input control process in step E500. Specifically, during the variable effect, based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the valid period, an operation notice effect that expects the special game to be executed is executed, or the special game is performed. Performs processing for executing the operation deciding effect of whether or not to be executed, and saves in the sub RAM 130c based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the valid period in the waiting state for customers. The processing for displaying the game history information that has been played on the image display device and initializing (resetting) the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E600. Specifically, the effect mode (effect stage) in which the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP / SPSP reach effect that results in loss, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, multiple effect modes are displayed. Performs processing to update to any of the modes.

The "effect mode" is a production mode A to C set in the low probability non-time saving game state, a production mode D to E set in the low probability time short game state, and a production mode set in the high probability time short game state. F to G are provided. When the power is turned on and the game is controlled to a low-probability non-time-saving game state (for example, after changing the setting, clearing the RWM, confirming the setting, etc.), the effect mode that is initially set is always effect mode A. Therefore, the effect mode that is initially set when the power is turned on and controlled to the low accuracy time-short game state is always the effect mode D, and when the power is turned on, the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy time-short game state. The effect mode set first is the effect mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game history update process in step E700. Specifically, processing is performed to update the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c according to the progress of the game (variation effect, big hit game, execution of small hit game).

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E800. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the effect RWM area in step E100 described above, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a command has been received. When the command is received, the process is moved to step E302, and when the command is not received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E303, and if it is not a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is the RWM clear designation command. If it is an RWM clear designation command, the process is transferred to step E305, and if it is not an RWM clear designation command, the process is transferred to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs the RWM clear notification process in step E305. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the RWM clear preparation notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E307, and if it is not a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting confirmation notification process in step E307. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is moved to step E309, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is moved to step E310.

In step E309, the sub CPU 130a performs the power ON notification process. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power recovery designation command. If this is the case, the process of setting the notification instruction command for executing the power recovery notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error-type designation command, the process is moved to step E311. If it is not an error-type designation command, the process is moved to step E312.

"Error system specification command" includes non-recoverable error specification command, illegal winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door opening error start specification command, door opening error end specification. Includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E311. Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error specification command (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification) Etc.), the notification command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is a customer waiting state specification command, the process is transferred to step E313, and if it is not a customer waiting state specification command, the process is transferred to step E314.

In step E313, the sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect preparation process. Specifically, the customer waiting effect waiting flag and the customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) until the customer waiting effect is started are set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, in the above-mentioned customer waiting effect control process, the customer waiting effect waiting flag and the customer waiting time are referred to, and the process for executing the customer waiting effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E315, and if it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E316.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state setting process in step E315. Specifically, a process of updating the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E317, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E318.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold number update process in step E317. Specifically, a process of updating the special figure hold number stored in the sub RAM 130c and setting an effect instruction command for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. Do. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icons displayed on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a start opening winning designation command. In the case of the start opening prize designation command, the received start opening prize designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the look-ahead storage area described later in the sub RAM 130c, and then the process is moved to step E319 to specify the start opening prize. If it is not a command, the process moves to step E320.

The "look-ahead storage area" is a first look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing look-ahead information (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, etc.) based on the first start opening prize designation command, and hold information based on the second start opening prize designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing the two, and a storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing the look-ahead information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed, and the first look-ahead unit. The storage unit and the second look-ahead storage unit are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and receive the first start opening winning designation command. Then, the look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reserved first special figures. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a younger number each time the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and receive the second start opening winning designation command. Then, the look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of the second special figure reserved. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a younger number each time the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special figure determination information execution storage area, and is the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. To.

In step E319, the sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead effect determination process. Specifically, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols (suggesting the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed are determined, and a process of setting an effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed in order to execute the look-ahead effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

As the look-ahead effect, a hold icon displayed on the image display device or an icon change effect in which the icon is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal display mode, or a predetermined effect is performed during one or more variable display (variable effect). There is a look-ahead continuous notice effect to be executed.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E321, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E322.

The sub CPU 130a performs the symbol data determination process in step E321. Specifically, a process is performed to determine an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variation effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step E323, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step E326.

In step E323, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, the variation is an effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device based on the special figure variation pattern specified by the special figure variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table (not shown). A process of determining an effect pattern and setting an effect instruction command for executing a variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs the advance notice effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E323, the jackpot advance notice effect that makes the jackpot game expected to be executed (suggests that the jackpot game may be executed) is executed. Whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice effect is determined, and an effect instruction command for executing the jackpot advance notice effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the jackpot notice effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead effect determined in the look-ahead effect determination process of step E319 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a symbol determination command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step E327, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step E328.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process is performed in which an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the temporarily stopped state and ending the variable effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variation effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step E328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designated command. If it is a special game system designated command, the process is moved to step E329, and if it is not a special game system designated command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small hit opening designation command, a small hit ending designation command, and the like.

In step E329, the sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big hit game or the small hit game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the round is performed. In the case of the designated command, the process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the round effect of the round game and executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specified command, the jackpot game or A process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the ending effect of the small hit game and executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

(Modification example of main processing of production control unit)
A modified example of the main processing of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130 m. In this modification, it is premised that the backup power is not supplied to the sub RAM 130c and the game history information before the power is turned off is not inherited after the power is restored.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1a, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step E2a, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3a.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears 0) all the RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4a, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5a. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step E6a, all interrupts are permitted.

The sub CPU 130a performs the sub random number update process in step E7a. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the control CPU 141a.

First, the centralized CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initial settings such as built-in register settings, access permission to the central RAM 141c, initialization of the entire RWM area of the central RAM 141c (0 clear), and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts. ), Etc., and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The control CPU 141a performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 and the image display device (first image display device 70, first image display device 70, first) with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. 2 Performs processing for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71) and switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light. The details of the adjustment mode switching process will be described later.

The control CPU 141a performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, it is output from the audio output device 9 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sound. The details of the volume adjustment process will be described later.

The control CPU 141a performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the image display device (first image) is based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

It should be noted that not only the amount of light from the backlight of the image display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is adjusted, but also the amount of LED light provided in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. May also be adjustable.

The control CPU 141a performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the image display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is reduced to suppress power consumption. ..

In step T8, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command is not received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command is received, the process is transferred to step T9.

In step T9, the control CPU 141a performs the animation pattern setting process. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

The general CPU 141a performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c.

In step T11, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the image display device is set in the control RAM 141c. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, which will be described later. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The control CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the control RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above with reference to the scene switching counter, the weight frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the V blank interrupt processing described later. , The process of updating the address of the sound scene is performed based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The control CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer as an image display device. The process of displaying on (the first image display device, the second image display device 71) will be performed.

The control CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI).

As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various production sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step T4.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141. This command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving various commands transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

First, the control CPU 141a performs a command reception process in step T30. Specifically, when an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m is received, a process of storing the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command in the reception buffer of the control RAM 141c is performed. When this process is completed, the command reception interrupt process this time is completed.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The V-blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. This V-blank interrupt processing is executed every time a V-blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) is received every time the display of the effect image for one frame is completed (about 33 milliseconds).

First, the control CPU 141a performs counter update processing in step T50. Specifically, the process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) used in the above-mentioned animation control process or the like by +1 is performed.

In step T51, the control CPU 141a performs frame buffer switching command processing. Specifically, the image control unit 145 (VDP) is instructed to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM. As a result, every time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 milliseconds), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame". It will switch to "buffer" alternately.

In step T52, the control CPU 141a sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. This frame switching flag is referred to in step T11 of the main process of the overall control unit 141.

(Adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit)
The adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141.

First, in step T4-1, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the adjustment mode for adjusting the volume and the amount of light has already been set in the control RAM 141c. If the adjustment mode has not been set (this process is executed first after the power is turned on), the process is moved to step T4-3, and if the adjustment mode has been set, the process is performed in step T4-2. Transfer.

In step T4-2, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the state of the changeover switch 22 has changed. Specifically, the current state of the changeover switch 22 is compared with the state of the previous changeover switch 22 stored in the control RAM 141c in step T4-5 described later. If there is a change in the state of the changeover switch 22, the process is moved to step T4-3 to set the adjustment mode, and if there is no change in the state of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode is not set. This ends the adjustment mode switching process.

In step T4-3, the control CPU 141a selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59 (b), and in step T4-4, the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16) corresponding to the switch position of the changeover switch 22 and the reference. The information and the power saving mode (ON, OFF) are specified and set in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c. The reference information includes whether or not the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted using the cross key 19, the adjustment range of the volume value in the volume adjustment, the initial value of the volume value of the effect sound, and the backlight of the image display device using the cross key 19. It is the possibility of adjusting the light amount of, the adjustment range of the light amount value in the light amount adjustment, and the initial value of the light amount value of the backlight.

In step T4-5, the control CPU 141a sets the current state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 to a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c, and ends the adjustment mode switching process this time. The state of the changeover switch 22 set here will be referred to in step T4-2.

(Changeover switch and adjustment mode selection table)
The changeover switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing the appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 59 (b) is a diagram showing an adjustment mode selection table.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the changeover switch 22 is rotatably (360 degrees) supported with respect to the switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals inside and the switch body 22a. It is a non-shorting type rotary switch that has an operation unit 22b, and by rotating the operation unit 22b, the selection terminal to which the common terminal of the operation unit 22b is connected changes and the switch is switched (switch position changes). To do).

Further, 16 scales (0 to F) indicating the positions (contacts) of the selection terminals to which the common terminals are connected are provided on the upper surface of the switch body 22a, and the common terminals are connected to the operation unit 22b. An arrow indicating a selection terminal is provided. Therefore, the state of the switch (switch position) can be grasped by the scale of the switch main body 22a and the arrow of the operation unit 22b.

The changeover switch 22 may be configured by a slide switch that opens and closes the contacts by sliding the operation unit linearly, or a DIP switch or the like that changes the contacts by operating any of the plurality of operation units. It may be configured by.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the adjustment mode selection table includes the switch position (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16), and the reference information (volume adjustment enable / not, volume value adjustment). The range, volume initial value, light amount adjustable / not, light amount value adjustment range, light amount initial value) are associated with the setting of the power saving mode.

For example, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is "1", "mode 2" is set as the adjustment mode, "possible (variable)" is set as the volume adjustment enable / disable, and "1 to" is set as the volume value adjustment range. "5" is set, "1" is set as the initial volume value, "possible (variable)" is set as the light intensity adjustment possibility, "1 to 5" is set as the light intensity value adjustment range, and "1 to 5" is set as the light intensity initial value. 1 ”is set, and“ OFF ”is set as the power saving mode.

The first feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59 (b) is that volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible (variable) in adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is in the range of 0 to 5. In the adjustment mode 7 to 11 where the switch position is in the range of 6 to A, the volume can be adjusted (variable) but the light intensity cannot be adjusted (fixed), and the switch position is in the range of B to F. In ~ 16, the volume cannot be adjusted (fixed), but the amount of light can be adjusted (variable). By doing so, it becomes possible to select (set) whether or not the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are possible by the rough operation of the changeover switch 22, and the convenience when the game clerk operates is improved.

The second feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59B is that the initial volume value and the initial light intensity value are set by switching the adjustment mode by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing so, the volume (value) and the amount of light (value) can be adjusted by operating the changeover switch 22, and the convenience of the game clerk can be improved.

As the third feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59 (b), the power saving (eco) mode setting is set to OFF in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 and the adjustment modes 12 to 16, and the adjustment modes 7 to 11 are set to OFF. The power saving (eco) mode setting is set to ON, and it is possible to set the power saving mode ON / OFF by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing so, it is possible to set whether to turn on or off the power saving mode according to the intention of the game store, and it is possible to control the power consumption of the game machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the operating cost of the entire amusement store.

(Circuit configuration of voice control unit)
A circuit configuration centered on the voice control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration centered on the voice control unit 148.

As shown in FIG. 60, the voice control unit 148 is compressed with a general control unit 141 that outputs various voice control commands related to voice output to the voice control unit 148, and various voice data (directed sound, system sound). A voice ROM 149 or the like stored as data is connected.

The audio control unit 148 includes a control unit 148a that outputs output control commands (decoding unit control command, volume control command, etc.) related to audio data and volume based on the audio control command transmitted from the general control unit 141, and a control unit. A plurality of audio channels (ch0 to ch39) to which output control commands output from 148a are input, a mixer 148d that mixes and outputs audio signals output from each of the plurality of audio channels, and a mixer 148d that is output from the mixer 148d. The audio signal processing unit 148e that performs predetermined audio processing (equalization, effect processing, pan, loop, etc.) on the signal, the operational amplifier 148f as an amplification device, and the audio signal that is a digital signal are converted into an analog signal. It is provided with a D / A conversion unit 148 g for outputting to the audio output device 9.

The plurality of audio channels include a fixed channel group in which a plurality of fixed channels used for the output of the notification sound are set, and a variable channel group in which a plurality of variable channels used for the output of the production sound are set. , The decoding unit 148b0 to 148b39 that performs processing (reading / decompression of audio data from the audio ROM 149, playback start, playback pause, playback end) according to the input decoding unit control command, and the input volume control command. It is equipped with a channel volume control unit that performs processing (output volume setting, fade-in, fade-out) according to the above.

In the decoding unit, "playback status (playing, waiting)" indicating whether or not the sound is being played on the audio channel, and "priority (high, medium)", which is the priority of the sound being played on the audio channel, are displayed. , Low) ”and status information such as“ sound number ”which is a number for identifying the voice to be played / played.

In the channel volume control unit, "volume", which is the output amount (percentage to the maximum volume) of the audio currently being played on the audio channel, and whether fade-in / fade-out is set for the audio currently being played on the audio channel. Status information such as "fade status", which is information on whether or not they are completed and whether or not they are completed, is included.

Therefore, the control unit 148a can constantly grasp the processing status of these voice channels by periodically acquiring the status information from the voice channel decoding unit and the channel volume control unit.

A plurality of audio data (phrase data) such as background sound (BGM), sound effect, and notification sound used in the game machine are stored in the audio ROM 149 as compressed digital data. As the audio data compression method, for example, a modified discrete cosine transform or the like can be used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio data may not be compressed.

(Audio channel configuration)
The configuration of the voice channel of the voice control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration of a voice channel of the voice control unit 148.

As shown in FIG. 61, of the plurality of voice channels (0ch to 39ch) included in the voice control unit 148, six voice channels 0ch to 5ch are fixed channels fixed to the use of the notification sound. , It cannot be used for directing sound. On the other hand, the 34 audio channels of 6ch to 39ch are variable channels used for the production sound, and when the production sound is output, the control unit 148a is an audio channel vacant from the audio channels of 6ch to 39ch. Is selected and used for reproducing the audio data instructed by the integrated control unit 141.

In this way, since the plurality of audio channels are distinguished into a fixed channel for the notification sound and a variable channel for the production sound, for example, a serious (high priority) error such as a magnetic error occurs in the game machine 1. In this case, by muting or stopping the effect sound output from the variable channel, the notification sound can be easily output with priority. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of which channel the production sound is output from, and the audio channel can be used efficiently.

(Voice management table)
The voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the voice management table, the sound number of the voice data, the type of the voice data, the output format of the voice data (stereo, monaural), the priority of the voice data, and the output volume of the voice data are displayed. It is associated and the explanation of the system sound is described for reference.

The sound numbers "1" to "12" are notification sounds related to the security of the gaming machine 1, and the output format is "monaural" and the priority is set to "high", "medium", or "low". There are those that are output at a fixed volume (MAX volume corresponding to the volume value "5") and those that are output depending on the volume value.
The sound numbers "13" to "100" are the production sounds related to the production in the gaming machine 1, the output format is "monaural" or "stereo", the priority is set to "low", and all the volumes are volume. It is output at a volume that depends on the value.
The sound numbers "101" to "105" are notification sounds related to the adjusted volume, the output format is "monaural", the priority is set to "low", and all are volumes that depend on the volume value. It is output.

The "power-on notification sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c (payout RAM 121c) is initialized (setting change, RWM clear). ).
The "power restoration notification sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is restored from a power failure.
The “unrecoverable error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an unrecoverable error that stops the progress of the game occurs on the main control board 110.
The "illegal winning error sound" means that the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 when the auxiliary game is not in progress, or the game ball wins in the big winning opening when the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not in progress. This is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an illegal winning error such as spilling occurs.
"Abnormal winning error sound" is output until the power is turned off when an abnormal winning error occurs in which the number of game balls that have won in various winning openings and the number of game balls that are discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning balls to flow down do not match. This is a notification sound (error sound).

The "magnetic error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) output over a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a magnetic error for detecting an abnormal magnetic force occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 55a.
The "radio wave error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) output over a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a radio wave error for detecting an abnormal radio wave occurs in the radio wave detection sensor 56a.
The "door opening error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) output over the opening period when a door opening error for detecting the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 occurs with the opening detection switch 31a. Is.
The "setting key switch error sound" indicates that the setting key switch 112a is turned off again when a setting key error occurs in which the setting key switch 112a changes from the OFF state to the ON state while the progress control of the game is being performed. It is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until it becomes.
The "clear switch error sound" is a notification output over a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a clear switch error occurs in which the RWM clear switch 111a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed. It is a sound (error sound).
The "dish full error sound" is output for the period during which the game ball is full when a plate full error occurs in which the lower plate 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a that the game ball is full. This is a notification sound (error sound).
In the "right-handed error sound", a right-handed error occurred in which a game ball was detected at the normal gate 44 or the second starting port 47 during a period in which right-handed hitting aimed at the right-handed game area should not be performed (for example, in a normal game state). Occasionally, it is a notification sound (error sound) that is output over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The priority of the notification sound is set according to the importance of the security abnormality (error), and the priority is set so that the abnormality that leads to fraudulent activity has a higher priority. Therefore, when a plurality of security abnormalities having different priorities occur at the same time, it is controlled so that only one notification sound having a higher priority can be heard. For example, if a magnetic error of sound number "6" occurs while the door opening error sound of sound number "8" is being output, the door opening error sound of sound number "8" is muted to inaudible sound ( Mute) and output a magnetic error sound. Then, when the output period of the magnetic error sound has elapsed, the output of the magnetic error sound is stopped, and if the output period of the door opening error has not passed, the volume of the door opening error sound is returned to the volume before mute. It has become.

Therefore, even if a security error of a low-priority sound number occurs while outputting a high-priority sound number notification sound, the low-priority sound number notification sound should not be output. become. Further, when a security abnormality (error) having the same priority occurs, a notification sound corresponding to the security abnormality (error) that occurs later is output.

In addition, while the production sound (BGM, etc.) or volume notification sound is being output at an audible volume, the notification sound whose output volume is set to a fixed volume (volume value "5") has a priority of "high" or "medium". When starting the output of, the current volume value saved in the volume value area of the control RAM 141c is saved (saved) in the save area of the control RAM 141c, and then the current volume value is set to the non-audible volume. By setting "0" and outputting the volume change command to the voice control unit 148, the effect sound (BGM or the like) and the volume notification sound are output at a non-audible volume.

In addition, during the output of the production sound (BGM, etc.) and the volume notification sound at a non-audible volume, the notification that the output volume is set to a fixed volume (volume value "5") and the priority is "high" or "medium". When the sound output is finished, the volume value saved in the save area of the control RAM 141c is returned to the volume value area, and the volume change command is output to the voice control unit 148 to produce the sound (BGM, etc.). And volume notification sound is output at the original volume. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game clerk and the player to hear the notification sound.

(Volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit)
The volume adjustment process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment process of the overall control unit 141.

First, in step T5-1, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume can be adjusted (variable) set in the control RAM 141c. If the volume adjustment is possible, the process is moved to step T5-2, and if the volume adjustment is not possible (impossible), the volume cannot be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19 in step T5. Move the process to -19.

In step T5-2, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not a security abnormality notification sound having a priority of "medium" or higher is being output. If the notification sound for a security abnormality with a priority of "medium" or higher is being output, the process is moved to step T5-19 assuming that the volume cannot be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and the priority is "medium". If the above security abnormality notification sound is not being output, the process proceeds to step T5-3.

In step T5-3, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume can be adjusted. Specifically, the volume can be adjusted during the waiting state for customers and the fluctuation effect, and the volume cannot be adjusted during the light intensity adjustment. If the volume is in the adjustable period, the process is moved to step T5-4 assuming that the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and if it is not in the volume adjustable period, the operation of the cross key 19 is performed. The process is moved to step T5-19 as the volume cannot be adjusted based on the above.

In step T5-4, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 are operated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an operation signal input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If there is an operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, the process is transferred to step T5-10, and if there is no operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, the process is transferred to step T5-5.

In step T5-5, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is currently in the waiting state for customers. If it is in the customer waiting state, the process is transferred to step T5-6, and if it is not in the customer waiting state, the process is transferred to step T5-15.

In step T5-6, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the non-display of the volume system image, which will be described later, continues for 5 seconds while waiting for customers. If the hiding of the volume system image continues for 5 seconds, the process is moved to step T5-7, and if the hiding of the volume system image does not continue for 5 seconds, the process is performed in step T5-8. Transfer.

The "volume system image" is a volume adjustment guide image for guiding that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, and a volume adjustment guide image for notifying the current volume value and operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19. It is an image during volume adjustment to guide that the value is adjusted.

In step T5-7, the control CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume adjustment guide image in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs a process for displaying the volume adjustment guide image on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device 71).

In step T5-8, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the non-operation of the cross key 19 in the customer waiting state has continued for 20 minutes. If the non-operation of the cross key 19 has not continued for 20 minutes, the process is moved to step T5-15 assuming that it cannot be determined whether or not the previous player has finished the game, and the non-operation of the cross key 19 is performed. If it continues for 20 minutes, in step T5-9, the current volume value is reset to the initial value of the volume value set in the control RAM 141c, assuming that the previous player has completed the game.

In step T5-10, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed. If the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed, the process is moved to step T5-14 to switch to the volume adjustment guide image, and if the volume adjustment guide image is not being displayed, the process is moved to step T5-11. ..

In step T5-11, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjusting image is being displayed. If the volume-adjusting image is being displayed, the process is moved to step T5-12 to adjust the volume, and if the volume-adjusting image is not being displayed, the step is to display the volume adjustment guidance image. The process is transferred to T5-14.

In step T5-12, the control CPU 141a performs a volume change process for changing the volume value. Specifically, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the volume value is subtracted by 1 if the volume value stored in the control RAM 141c is not the lower limit value, and the right button of the cross key 19 is operated. If there is, the volume value is added by 1 if it is not the upper limit of the volume value stored in the control RAM 141c, and the volume change flag is set in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c. As a result, the presence / absence of the volume change flag is referred to in the above-mentioned voice control process, the volume change command is output to the voice control unit 148, and the volume of the effect sound being output is changed.

In step T5-13, the control CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the volume notification sound according to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c. As a result, the voice control unit 148 performs a process for outputting the volume notification sound according to the current volume value from the voice output device 9.

In step T5-14, the control CPU 141a sets an animation pattern of the volume-adjusting image according to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the control RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 (instead of the volume adjustment guide image when the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed) displays the volume-adjusting image on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device). The process for displaying in 71) will be performed. When this process is completed, the volume adjustment process this time is completed.

In step T5-15, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjusting image is being displayed. If the volume-adjusting image is being displayed, the process is moved to step T5-16 to determine whether or not the conditions for erasing the volume-adjusting image are satisfied, and the volume-adjusting image is displayed. If it is not inside, the volume adjustment process this time is terminated.

In step T5-16, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is operated. If there is an operation of the effect button 17, the process is transferred to step T5-18, and if there is no operation of the effect button 17, the process is transferred to step T5-17.

In step T5-17, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the non-operation of the cross key 19 has continued for 10 seconds. If the non-operation of the cross key 19 continues for 10 seconds, the process is moved to step T5-18, and if the non-operation of the cross key 19 does not continue for 10 seconds, the image during volume adjustment is not deleted. The volume adjustment process this time is finished.

In step T5-18, the control CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume-adjusting image set in the control RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs a process for erasing the volume-adjusting image displayed on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device 71). When this process is completed, the volume adjustment process this time is completed.

In step T5-19, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume system image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjusting image) is being displayed. If the volume-based image is being displayed, the process is moved to step T5-20, and if the volume-based image is not being displayed, the volume adjustment process this time is terminated.

In step T5-20, the control CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume system image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjusting image) set in the control RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs a process for erasing the volume-based image displayed on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device). When this process is completed, the volume adjustment process this time is completed.

Although the description of the light amount adjustment process is omitted in the present embodiment, the basic process flow is different from the volume adjustment process in that the notification sound is output after the light amount value is changed. Are the same, so it is only necessary to read "volume" and "light intensity" in the volume adjustment process.

(Specific example when volume adjustment is performed while waiting for customers)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed while waiting for customers will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The basic flow is the same when the amount of light is adjusted.

Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is "2", and the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position "2" are set in the integrated RAM 144, and the volume value is set. It is assumed that the light intensity value is set to "3 (light intensity 80%)" while being set to "2 (volume 40%)".

At this time, as shown in FIG. 64A, the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are enabled during the valid period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and the first image display device 70 is powered by a power source. "135", which is the initial effect symbol 70a at the time of turning on, is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

After that, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are invalidated, and the period shifts to the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment). At this time, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the volume adjusting image OG corresponding to the current volume value "2" is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70.

When the left button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is subtracted by 1 to become "1". At this time, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the volume-adjusting image OG that has already been displayed is updated to the volume-adjusting image OG according to the subtracted volume value "1", and the sound output device 9 sends the image OG. The volume notification sound "do" corresponding to the volume value "1" is output at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "1".

After that, when the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment) ends, and the effective period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment is reached. At this time, when the volume adjusting image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased and the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 64 (d). , Volume adjustment guide image OAG and light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

Then, when 30 seconds have passed from the last operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the customer waiting effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the BGM (customer waiting effect sound) corresponding to the customer waiting effect is displayed from the audio output device 9. Is output.

In this way, when the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image) is hidden, the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image) can be displayed without changing the volume value by operating the cross key 19. Since the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 when it is displayed, the volume value (light intensity adjustment) can be adjusted after confirming the current volume value (light intensity value), improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

(Specific example when volume adjustment is performed during variable production)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 65. The basic flow is the same when the amount of light is adjusted.

Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is "2", and the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position "2" are set in the integrated RAM 144, and the volume value is set. It is assumed that the light intensity value is set to "3 (light intensity 80%)" while being set to "2 (volume 40%)".

In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are valid during the valid period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, and the first image display device 70 has , "135", which is the initial effect symbol 70a at the time of turning on the power, is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60, the variation effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65B, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a is started in the first image display device 70, and the BGM corresponding to the variation effect is set to the volume value “2” from the audio output device 9. It depends (corresponds) and is output at a volume of 20%.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are invalidated, and the period shifts to the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment). At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the volume adjusting image OG corresponding to the current volume value "2" is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70.

When the right button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is added by 1 to become "3". At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the volume-adjusting image OG that has already been displayed is updated to the volume-adjusting image OG according to the volume value "3" after addition, and is output from the audio output device 9. The BGM is output at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value "3".

After that, when the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period during which the volume can be adjusted (during volume adjustment) ends, and the effective period for volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment is reached. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the volume adjusting image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased.

In this way, by making it possible to adjust the volume (adjust the amount of light) by operating the cross key 19 even during the execution of the variable effect, the convenience of the player is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is not possible even at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect, but the volume is temporarily adjusted (light amount adjustment) at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect. ) May be disabled. In that case, the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image) may be erased, or only the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) may not be possible while being displayed.

Also, instead of displaying the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image) even during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is performed without displaying the volume adjusting image OG (light amount adjusting image). It may be possible.

(Specific example when setting is changed)
A specific example of a case where the setting is changed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. 66 (1) to (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the process of waiting for the startup of another board is performed. At this time, the signal is not output from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, and the second special symbol hold are held. The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the start waiting process is completed and the process shifts to the start process, and when it is detected that the setting change operation has been performed at the timing of T3, the set value is changed (winning of the game ball). (No detection or error occurrence detection, etc.) Shifts to the setting change mode and sends the setting change specification command. Further, the setting changing signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (any of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113.

Then, when it is detected that the set value confirmation operation has been performed at the timing of T4, a power-on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (winning detection of the game ball, error occurrence detection, etc.). The game progress mode is entered, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (update of the normal middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter) is started.

At this time, the output of the power-on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are displayed. , A predetermined initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) is displayed, and the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator are displayed. Reference numeral 64 denotes a display indicating that the number of reserved special figures is “0”, and the information display 113 starts a lighting confirmation to fully turn on the 7-segment display.

After that, when it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, and when the execution time (5 seconds) of the lighting confirmation elapses at the timing of T6, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

Next, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is detected at the timing of T9 after passing the timing of T7 to T8, the prize balls (three game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95. The normal payout number counter is updated to indicate that the 1st special symbol hold indicator 63 is the 1st special symbol hold number "1", and the 1st special symbol memory designation command and the 1st start opening prize designation command are displayed. Send a pre-variation command such as.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the number of the first special figure hold is subtracted, the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special figure hold number "0" is displayed, and the stop display is made. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation start command such as the special symbol specification command or the special symbol variation pattern specification command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses at the timing of T11, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T12, it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state. , Send a customer waiting status specification command.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 (1) and 67. Note that FIGS. 67 (1-a) to (1-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67 (1-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 67 (1-b)).

Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting change mode for changing the setting and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed (see FIG. 67 (1-c)).

After that, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the power-on notification is started. At this time, the power-on notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power-on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6 has passed. When the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the voice output from the voice output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the initial effect symbol "135", the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67 (1-e)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power-on notification ends. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state.

After that, at the timing of T9, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol storage stored in the sub RAM 130c is held. Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 (2) and 67. Note that FIGS. 67 (2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67 (2-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 67 (2-b)).

Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed (see FIG. 67 (2-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power-on notification that should normally be executed is not executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (2-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-e)).

Then, at the T9 timing after the timings of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of 1st special figure reservations that have been made. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIGS. 66 (3) and 67, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received is shown. explain. Note that FIGS. 67 (3-a) to (3-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67 (3-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 67 (3-b)).

Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed (see FIG. 67 (3-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should normally be executed is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (3-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. Continue the setting change mode without doing so. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (3-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after passing the timings of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the sub RAM 130c The stored number of 1st special figure reservations is updated, but the setting change mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern specification command is issued. When it is received normally, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and amount of light can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (3-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (3-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIGS. 66 (4) and 67, an effect when the power-on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. Note that FIGS. 67 (4-a) to (4-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 67 (4-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 67 (4-b)).

Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed (see FIG. 67 (4-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should normally be executed is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. Continue the setting change mode without doing so. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after passing the timings of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the sub RAM 130c The stored number of 1st special figure reservations is updated, but the setting change mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern specification command is executed. If reception error occurs without normal reception, the setting change mode is continued without executing the fluctuation effect that should be executed normally. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-f)).

Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the setting change mode is continued without deriving the result of the variation effect that should be derived normally. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 67 (4-h)).

In this way, the adjustment mode can be switched (set the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 side is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game clerk can be extended, and the convenience on the game shop side can be improved.

Further, after the effect control board 130 side shifts to the setting change mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally executed. At the timing of reception, the setting change mode (setting changing screen) ends and the mode shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), so that the mode can be changed according to the change in the effect control by the effect control board 130. Become.

In addition, at the timing of shifting from the setting change mode (setting changing screen) to the effect progress mode (effect screen), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player). Therefore, it is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light while actually checking the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, first) 2 When a game ball wins in the starting port 47, the first large winning opening 50, and the second large winning opening 53), this winning is invalidated and the game ball is not paid out, and the payout is made according to this winning. Since the number is not collected and the normal base value is not calculated and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change, the player can play the game only when the player can play the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, if the game ball flows into the out port 39 when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow occurs. Since it becomes invalid, the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change, so that the player can play the game. Performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when it can be executed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball wins in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53), this The winning is valid and the game ball is paid out, the number of payouts corresponding to this winning is collected and the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 changes. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (directing progress mode) is not apparent, the performance information (history information) of the game machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information is provided. It becomes possible.

Further, because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball flows into the out port 39 while the game is being played, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and usually displayed on the information display 113 as a target for calculating the base value. Since the normal base value to be played may change, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if it is not in the gaming progress mode (directing progress mode). It is possible to provide accurate performance information.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are not executed (error specification command is transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (effect screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are made. Since it is executed (an error specification command is sent) and error notification is in a state where it can be executed, unnecessary processing is not performed in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player will play a game or cheat while changing settings. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device. If so, various error judgments are executed (error specification command is sent) and error notification is executed, so an error occurs even if the game progress mode (effect progress mode) is not apparent. Can be accurately notified. In this case, the display of the setting changing screen may be terminated by shifting to the effect progress mode, or the display of the setting changing screen may be maintained without shifting to the effect progress mode.

When shifting from the setting change mode (setting changing screen) to the effect progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (player) even if the power-on notification is executed (player). The volume and the amount of light may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound is completed, instead of making the power-on notification possible. The volume and the amount of light may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when is completely completed.

Also, instead of preventing the transition to the production progress mode even if the special symbol memory designation command or start opening prize designation command as the pre-change command is normally received during the setting change mode, the special symbol memory designation command or start is performed. It is also possible to shift to the production progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Also, instead of preventing the mode from shifting to the effect progress mode even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting change mode, the mode may be shifted to the effect progress mode when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good. Note that the symbol confirmation command may include information indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination. In this case, an effect symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (for example, "777" for a big hit, "246" for a loss, etc. ) Is displayed, but it is preferable to display the common initial effect symbol "135" when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state).

In addition, when the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the start port is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode and the normal screen (effect screen). ) Is not displayed (variation effect is started), but the setting change mode may be continued and the change display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting changing screen is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to shift to the effect progress mode and display the normal screen (effect screen) by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command or the opening designation command.

Further, the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the setting change notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the power-on notification. In this way, it becomes easy to recognize whether the setting change notification or the power-on notification is performed.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. When it is executed, even if various errors occur and an error specification command is transmitted, the setting change notification is maintained in the image display device and the error notification is regulated (restricted). It is advisable to set the priority (importance) of error notification lower (lower) than the setting change notification.

(Specific example when RWM clear is performed)
A specific example of the case where the RWM is cleared when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIGS. 68 (1) to 68 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the process of waiting for the startup of another board is performed. At this time, the signal is not output from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, and the second special symbol hold are held. The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, the start waiting process ends and the process shifts to the start process, and when it is detected that the RWM clear operation has been performed at the timing of T3, a predetermined area of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. The mode shifts to the RWM clear mode (the winning detection of the game ball and the occurrence of an error are not detected), and the RWM clear designation command is transmitted. In addition, the RWM clearing signal is output from the security signal terminal.

Then, when it is detected that the RWM clear confirmation operation has been performed at the timing of T4, a power-on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (winning detection of the game ball, error occurrence detection, etc.). The game progress mode is entered, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (update of the normal middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter) is started.

At this time, the output of the power-on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are displayed. , A predetermined initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) is displayed, and the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator are displayed. The 64 and the normal symbol hold indicator 65 are displayed to indicate that the number of special figure hold indicators is “0”, and the information display 113 starts the lighting confirmation to fully turn on the 7-segment display.

After that, when it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, and when the execution time (5 seconds) of the lighting confirmation elapses at the timing of T6, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

Next, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is detected at the timing of T9 after passing the timing of T7 to T8, the prize balls (three game balls) are paid out from the payout device 95. The normal payout number counter is updated to indicate that the 1st special symbol hold indicator 63 is the 1st special symbol hold number "1", and the 1st special symbol memory designation command and the 1st start opening prize designation command are displayed. Send a pre-variation command such as.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the number of the first special figure hold is subtracted, the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special figure hold number "0" is displayed, and the stop display is made. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation start command such as the special symbol specification command or the special symbol variation pattern specification command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses at the timing of T11, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T12, it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state. , Send a customer waiting status specification command.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 (1) and 69. Note that FIGS. 69 (1-a) to (1-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69 (1-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 69 (1-b)).

Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (1-c)).

After that, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the power-on notification is started. At this time, the power-on notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power-on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6 has passed. When the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the voice output from the voice output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the initial effect symbol "135", the background image, and the like (see FIG. 69 (1-e)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power-on notification ends. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state.

After that, at the timing of T9, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol storage stored in the sub RAM 130c is held. Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 69 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 (2) and 69. Note that FIGS. 69 (2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69 (2-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 69 (2-b)).

Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (2-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power-on notification that should normally be executed is not executed. .. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (2-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-e)).

Then, at the T9 timing after the timings of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of 1st special figure reservations that have been made. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 67 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIGS. 68 (3) and 69, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received is shown. explain. Note that FIGS. 69 (3-a) to (3-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69 (3-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 69 (3-b)).

Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (3-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should normally be executed is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (3-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. Continue the RWM clear mode without. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the clear confirmation screen (see FIG. 69 (3-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after passing the timings of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the sub RAM 130c The stored number of 1st special figure reservations is updated, but the RWM clear mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and then the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is continued. Is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the variable effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and amount of light can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (3-f)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (3-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 69 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIGS. 68 (4) and 69, an effect when the power-on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. Note that FIGS. 69 (4-a) to (4-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 69 (4-a)).

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 69 (4-b)).

Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that the RWM clear is performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (see FIG. 69 (4-c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should normally be executed is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-d)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. Continue the RWM clear mode without. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the clear confirmation screen (see FIG. 69 (4-e)).

Then, at the timing of T9 after passing the timings of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the sub RAM 130c The stored number of 1st special figure reservations is updated, but the RWM clear mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and then the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is continued. If a reception error occurs without being able to receive the command normally, the RWM clear mode is continued without executing the variation effect that should be executed normally. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-f)).

Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the RWM clear mode is continued without deriving the result of the variation effect that should be derived normally. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-g)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 69 (4-h)).

In this way, the adjustment mode can be switched (set the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 side is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game clerk can be extended, and the convenience on the game shop side can be improved.

Further, after the effect control board 130 side shifts to the RWM clear mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally executed. At the timing of reception, the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) ends and the mode shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), so that the mode can be changed according to the change in the effect control by the effect control board 130. ..

In addition, at the timing of shifting from the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by the operation (player) of the cross key 19. It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light while actually checking the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second). If a game ball wins in the starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, and the second big winning opening 53), this winning is invalidated and the game ball is not paid out, and the number of payouts according to this winning. Is not collected and is not included in the calculation of the normal base value, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change. Therefore, the performance of the gaming machine only when the player can execute the game. Information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, if the game ball flows into the out port 39 when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear process) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow is invalid. Therefore, the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected and is excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change, so that the player executes the game. Performance information (history information) of gaming machines can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when possible, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball wins in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53), this winning is given. Is valid and the game balls are paid out, the number of payouts according to this prize is collected and the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 may change. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (directing progress mode) is not apparent, the performance information (history information) of the game machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided. Is possible.

Further, because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball flows into the out port 39 while the player is in the game, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and usually displayed on the information display 113 as a target for calculating the base value. Since the normal base value may change, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if it is not in the game progress mode (directing progress mode). , It is possible to provide accurate performance information.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear process) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are not executed (error specification command is transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (effect screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are executed. (An error specification command is sent) and error notification can be executed. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player will play a game or cheat during the RWM clearing process, no unnecessary processing is performed. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. At that time, various error judgments are executed (error specification command is sent) and error notification is executed. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (effect progress mode) is not apparently set, an error may occur. It is possible to accurately notify. In this case, the display of the clear confirmation screen may be terminated by shifting to the effect progress mode, or the display of the clear confirmation screen may be maintained without shifting to the effect progress mode.

When shifting from the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) to the effect progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player) even if the power-on notification is executed. ) Is possible, but the volume and light amount may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the power-on notification sound output is completed, or the power-on notification may be sent. The volume and the amount of light may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the process is completely completed.

In addition, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the start opening prize designation command as the pre-variation command is normally received during the RWM clear mode, the special symbol memory designation command or the start is not prevented from shifting to the effect progress mode. It is also possible to shift to the production progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Also, instead of preventing the mode from shifting to the effect progress mode even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the RWM clear mode, the mode may be shifted to the effect progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

In addition, when the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the start port is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode and the normal screen (effect screen). ) Is displayed (variation effect is started), but the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the clear confirmation screen is displayed continuously in the RWM clear mode. In this case, it is preferable to shift to the effect progress mode and display the normal screen (effect screen) by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command or the opening designation command.

Further, the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 in the RWM clear preparation notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 in the power-on notification. .. In this way, it becomes easy to recognize which of the RWM clear preparation notification and the power-on notification is performed.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error specification command is transmitted, the RWM clear preparation notification is maintained in the image display device and the error notification is regulated (restricted). , It is preferable to set the priority (importance) of the error notification lower (lower) than the RWM clear preparation notification.

(Specific example when the control state of the game is restored)
A specific example of a case where the control state of the game is restored without confirming the setting when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIGS. 70 (1) to 70 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, it is assumed that the game is restored to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state).

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the process of waiting for the startup of another board is performed. At this time, the signal is not output from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, and the second special symbol hold are held. The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are hidden.

Next, at the timing of T2, the start waiting process ends and the process shifts to the start process, and when it is detected that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation are not performed at the timing of T3, the power supply is supplied. It shifts to the game progress mode to control the progress of the game by sending the recovery designation command, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (normal payout number counter, total out number counter) , Normal medium out count counter update) is started.

At this time, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 have a plurality of initial symbols (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display) which are predetermined loss outcomes. (A state in which one of the LEDs is lit) is displayed, and the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and the normal symbol hold indicator 65 have the number of special symbol hold indicators "0". Is displayed, and the information display 113 starts a lighting confirmation that all the 7-segment displays are turned on.

Then, when it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state at the timing of T4, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and when the execution time (5 seconds) of the lighting confirmation elapses at the timing of T5, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

After that, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is detected at the timing of T8 after passing the timing of T6 to T7, the prize balls (three game balls) are usually paid out from the payout device 95. The middle payout number counter is updated to indicate that the 1st special symbol hold indicator 63 is the 1st special symbol hold number "1", such as the 1st special symbol memory designation command and the 1st start opening prize designation command. Send the pre-variation command.

Next, at the timing of T9, when the number of the first special figure hold is subtracted, the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special figure hold number "0" is displayed, and the stop display is made. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation start command such as the special symbol specification command or the special symbol variation pattern specification command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Next, when the fluctuation time elapses at the timing of T10, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T11, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 (1) and 71. It should be noted that FIGS. 71 (1-a) to (1-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 71 (1-a)).

Then, when the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the power restoration notification is started. At this time, a power restoration notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a power restoration screen indicating that the power has been restored (see FIG. 71 (1-b)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power recovery notification is continued. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the power recovery screen (see FIG. 71 (1-c)).

Next, at the timing of T6 after the timing of T5, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the output of the voice from the voice output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect symbol and the background image (see FIG. 71 (1-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol storage stored in the sub RAM 130c is held. Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 71 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 (2) and 71, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described. It should be noted that FIGS. 71 (2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 71 (2-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should normally be executed will not be executed. .. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (2-b)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-c)).

Next, at the timing of T6 after the timing of T5, the first image display device 70 is in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect symbol and the background image (FIG. 71 (2-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7, when the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, the demo BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the demo decorative light emission to attract the interest of the player. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the interest of the player is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 71 (2-e). )reference).

After that, at the timing of T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol storage stored in the sub RAM 130c is held. Update the number and end the customer waiting production. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect symbol “135”, the background image, and the like, and additionally displays the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (2-f)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 71 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of the effect control board)
Next, using FIGS. 70 (3) and 71, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received is shown. explain. It should be noted that FIGS. 71 (3-a) to (3-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 71 (3-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should normally be executed will not be executed. .. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (3-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state of waiting for customers, which should normally be changed, is not changed. Continues to wait for commands. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (3-c)).

Then, at the timings of T5 to T7, since no command has been received from the main control board 110, the command waiting state is continued. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIGS. 71 (3-d) and 71 (3-e)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. The number of holds is updated, but the command waiting state continues. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and then the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is issued. When it is received normally, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and amount of light can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 71 (3-f)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (3-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 71 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIGS. 70 (4) and 71, an effect when the power restoration designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. It should be noted that FIGS. 71 (4-a) to (4-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 71 (4-a)).

Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should normally be executed will not be executed. .. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (4-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state of waiting for customers, which should normally be changed, is not changed. Continues to wait for commands. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (4-c)).

Next, at the timing of T8 after passing the timings of T5 to T7, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol memory designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the sub RAM 130c The number of 1st special figure pending stored in is updated, but the command waiting state is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern specification command is issued. If it cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs, the fluctuation effect that should be executed is not executed and the command waiting state is continued. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (4-f)).

After that, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T10, the command waiting state is continued without deriving the result of the variation effect that should be derived normally. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the color bar and the version information (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 71 (4-h)).

In this way, the adjustment mode can be switched (set the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 side is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game clerk can be extended, and the convenience on the game shop side can be improved.

Further, after the effect control board 130 side shifts to the command waiting state, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally executed. At the timing of reception, the command waiting state (initial screen) ends and the mode shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), so that the mode shift can be performed according to the change in the effect control by the effect control board 130.

In addition, at the timing of shifting from the command waiting state (initial screen) to the effect progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player), so that it is actually possible. It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light while checking the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

When shifting from the command waiting state (initial screen) to the effect progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player) even if the power recovery notification is executed. It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power recovery notification sound is completed, instead of making it possible, and the power recovery notification is complete. The volume and the amount of light may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the process ends.

Also, instead of preventing the transition to the production progress mode even if the special symbol memory specification command as the pre-change command or the start opening prize specification command is normally received while waiting for the command, the special symbol memory specification command or start is performed. The mode may be shifted to the effect progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Also, instead of preventing the mode from shifting to the effect progress mode even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received while waiting for a command, the mode may be shifted to the effect progress mode when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

(Specific example when setting confirmation is performed)
A specific example in which the setting confirmation is performed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72 (1) to 72 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, after confirming the setting, it is assumed that the game is restored to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state).

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the process of waiting for the startup of another board is performed. At this time, the signal is not output from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, and the second special symbol hold are held. The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are hidden.

Next, at the timing of T2, the start waiting process ends and the process shifts to the start process, and when it is detected that the setting confirmation operation has been performed at the timing of T3, the set value saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is detected. Moves to the setting confirmation mode for confirming, and sends the setting confirmation specification command. Further, a setting confirmation signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current set value (any of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113.

Then, when it is detected that the confirmation end operation has been performed at the timing of T4, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (winning detection of the game ball, error occurrence detection, etc. are performed). ) The game progress mode is entered, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (update of the normal middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter) is started.

At this time, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 have a plurality of initial symbols (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display) which are predetermined loss outcomes. (A state in which one of the LEDs is lit) is displayed, and the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are displayed to indicate that the number of special symbol reservations is “0”, and the information display 113. Now, the lighting confirmation for turning on all the 7-segment displays is started.

After that, when it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted, and when the execution time (5 seconds) of the lighting confirmation elapses at the timing of T6, the information display 113 is displayed. Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

After that, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is detected at the timing of T9 after passing the timing of T7 to T8, the prize balls (three game balls) are usually paid out from the payout device 95. The middle payout number counter is updated to indicate that the 1st special symbol hold indicator 63 is the 1st special symbol hold number "1", such as the 1st special symbol memory designation command and the 1st start opening prize designation command. Send the pre-variation command.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the number of the first special figure hold is subtracted, the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special figure hold number "0" is displayed, and the stop display is made. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation start command such as the special symbol specification command or the special symbol variation pattern specification command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 is displayed. Start.

Next, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 to determine the symbol confirmation command, and at the timing of T12, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, the customer waiting state specification command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 (1) and 73. It should be noted that FIGS. 73 (1-a) to (1-i) correspond to each of FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 73 (1-a)).

Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 73 (1-b)).

After that, when the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the power restoration notification is started. At this time, a power restoration notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a power restoration screen indicating that the power has been restored (see FIG. 73 (1-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer waiting state is entered, but the power recovery notification is continued. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the power recovery screen (see FIG. 73 (1-d)).

Then, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, the output of the voice from the voice output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, in the first image display device 70, in addition to the initial effect symbol and the background image, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-f)).

Next, at the timing of T9, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update the number of holds. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (1-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-h)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 73 (1-i)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 (2) and 73. It should be noted that FIGS. 73 (2-a) to (2-i) correspond to each of FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 73 (2-a)).

Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 73 (2-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should normally be executed is not executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 73 (2-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-d)).

Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, the first image display device 70 is in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect symbol and the background image ( See FIG. 73 (2-e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, the demo BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the demo decorative light emission to attract the interest of the player. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the interest of the player is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 73 (2-f). )reference).

Next, at the timing of T9, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c is received. Update the number of holds and end the customer waiting effect. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect symbol “135”, the background image, and the like, and additionally displays the first hold icon.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (2-g)).

Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-h)).

After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 73 (2-i)).

(Operation example 3 of the effect control board)
Next, using FIGS. 72 (3) and 73, an operation example 3 on the effect control board 130 side when the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received is shown. explain. It should be noted that FIGS. 73 (3-a) to (3-i) correspond to each of FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (setting the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 73 (3-a)).

Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 73 (3-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should normally be executed is not executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 73 (3-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. Continue the setting confirmation mode without doing so. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 73 (3-d)).

Then, at the timings of T6 to T8, since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIGS. 73 (3-e) to 73 (3-f)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol storage stored in the sub RAM 130c is held. Update the number but continue the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and then the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is continued. Is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the variable effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the variable effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the variable decorative light emission for decorating the variable effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), The background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (3-g)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the variation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the loss effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped after the variable display, is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (3-h)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer waiting state is in the customer waiting state. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the loss effect symbol 70a, the background image, and the like (see FIG. 73 (3-i)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIGS. 72 (4) and 73, an effect when the power recovery designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 4 on the control board 130 side will be described. It should be noted that FIGS. 73 (4-a) to (4-i) correspond to each of FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i).

First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by operating the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value). Also, it is impossible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state.

Next, at the timing of T2, when the start-up process is completed, the command wait state for receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed as an initial screen together with color bars of seven colors (see FIG. 73 (4-a)).

Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 73 (4-b)).

After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should normally be executed is not executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be lit in white. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 73 (4-c)).

Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the state shifts to the customer waiting state that should normally shift. Continue the setting confirmation mode without doing so. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 73 (4-d)).

Then, at the timings of T6 to T8, since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIGS. 73 (4-e) to 73 (4-f)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when a pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special symbol storage stored in the sub RAM 130c is held. Update the number but continue the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern specification command is issued. If reception error occurs without normal reception, the setting confirmation mode is continued without executing the fluctuation effect that should be executed normally. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T11, the setting confirmation mode is continued without deriving the result of the variation effect that should be derived normally. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 73 (4-h)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and the customer wait state is set. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 start the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize that the customer is in the waiting state, and the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It becomes a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (effect screen), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-time saving game state), the common initial effect symbol "135" and the power ON (low probability non-time saving game state) are turned on. ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 73 (4-i)).

In this way, the adjustment mode can be switched (set the initial volume value) by operating the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 side is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game clerk can be extended, and the convenience on the game shop side can be improved.

Further, after the effect control board 130 side shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the effect progress mode, that is, a command for significantly changing the display image of the image display device) is normally executed. At the timing of reception, the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) ends and the mode shifts to the effect progress mode (normal screen), so it is possible to shift the mode according to the change in the effect control by the effect control board 130. Become.

In addition, at the timing of shifting from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player). , It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light while actually checking the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, first) 2 When a game ball wins in the starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, and the second large winning opening 53), this winning is invalidated and the game ball is not paid out, and the payout is made according to this winning. Since the number is not collected and the normal base value is not calculated and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change, the player can play the game only when the player can play the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, if the game ball flows into the out port 39 when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow occurs. Since it becomes invalid, the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change, so that the player can play the game. Performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when it can be executed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

Further, because the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power recovery designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball wins in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second major winning opening 53), this The winning is valid and the game ball is paid out, the number of payouts corresponding to this winning is collected and the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 changes. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (directing progress mode) is not apparent, the performance information (history information) of the game machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information is provided. It becomes possible.

Further, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power recovery designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If a game ball flows into the out port 39 while the player is in the game, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and usually displayed on the information display 113 as a target for calculating the base value. Since the normal base value may change, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if it is not in the gaming progress mode (directing progress mode). Performance information can be provided.

Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments are not executed (error specification command is transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (effect screen) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are made. Since the error notification is executed (the error specification command is sent) and the error notification is in a state where it can be executed, unnecessary processing is not performed in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent act will be performed by the player during the setting confirmation process. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, since the effect control board 130 could not normally receive the power recovery designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. If so, various error judgments are executed (error specification command is sent) and error notification is executed, so an error occurs even if the game progress mode (effect progress mode) is not apparent. Can be accurately notified. In this case, the display of the setting confirmation screen may be terminated by shifting to the effect progress mode, or the display of the setting confirmation screen may be maintained without shifting to the effect progress mode.

When shifting from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross key 19 (player) even if the power recovery notification is executed (player). Instead of making it possible to set), the volume and light amount may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power recovery notification sound is completed, or the power recovery notification may be made. The volume and the amount of light may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when is completely completed.

Also, instead of preventing the transition to the production progress mode even if the special symbol memory designation command or start opening prize designation command as the pre-change command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol memory designation command or start is performed. It is also possible to shift to the production progress mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is normally received.

Also, instead of preventing the mode from shifting to the effect progress mode even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, the mode may be shifted to the effect progress mode when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

In addition, when the fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the start port is normally received, the mode shifts to the effect progress mode and the normal screen (effect screen). ) Is displayed (variation effect is started), but the setting confirmation mode may be continued and the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to shift to the effect progress mode and display the normal screen (effect screen) by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command or the opening designation command.

Further, the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the setting confirmation notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the power restoration notification. In this way, it becomes easy to recognize which of the setting confirmation notification and the power restoration notification is being performed.

In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error) are performed. When it is executed, even if various errors occur and an error specification command is sent, the image display device maintains the setting confirmation notification and the error notification is regulated (restricted). It is advisable to set the priority (importance) of error notification lower (lower) than the setting confirmation notification.

In the present embodiment, a game is played using a game medium such as a game ball, and when the grant condition is satisfied by the game, a predetermined amount of the game medium is given to the player as a prize. A game may be played using the value data (game value) corresponding to the above, and a predetermined amount of value data (game value) may be given to the player as a prize when the grant condition is satisfied by the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of giving a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game is general. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of the gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116888). However, in the gaming machines described in the above patent documents, there is a problem that the gaming machine performance is predetermined and the advantage of the gaming cannot be changed.

As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). A specific information calculation means for collecting specific information (normal base value) by collecting game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) generated in the above, and an information display unit (information display device) for calculating the specific information. The effect control means includes a specific information display means to be displayed on 113) and a transmission means for transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state. Along with receiving the first control information, a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) is displayed with a setting change image (setting changing screen), and the granting control means is displaying the setting changing image. When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), the grant control is not performed by the winning, and the specific information calculation means displays the setting change image. When the game medium wins in the winning area, the specific information is not calculated by the winning. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). A specific information calculation means that collects game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) and calculates specific information (normal base value), and an information display unit (information display device) that displays the specific information. The effect control means includes a specific information display means to be displayed on 113) and a transmission means for transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state. Along with receiving the first control information, a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) is displayed with a setting change image (setting changing screen), and the giving control means is displaying the setting changing image. When a game medium (game ball, medal) wins in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), the grant control is not performed by the winning, and the specific information calculation means displays the setting change image. When the game medium wins a prize in the prize area, the game information is not collected by the prize. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing the game and the grant control means (payout control board 120) for controlling the grant of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). The winning determination means for executing the winning determination as to whether or not the game medium (game ball, medal) has won the prize, and the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state. The effect control means displays a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. The game control means limits the execution of the winning determination when the setting is changed, and controls the execution of the winning determination after the setting change state is completed. There is. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information, and the second control information. If the display of the setting change image is terminated and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting is set even if the setting change state is completed. The display of the changed image is continued. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing the game control means, and the effect control means for controlling the game privilege (prize ball, medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a first control for the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state. Transmission means that transmits information (setting change designation command) and sends second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon termination of the setting change state, and game information (total out) generated in the game. Specific information calculation means for collecting specific information (normal base value) by collecting the number, normal medium out number, and normal medium payout number, and specific information for displaying the specific information on the information display unit (information display 113). The effect control means includes a display means, and the effect control means causes a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting changing screen) upon receiving the first control information. When the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is terminated. However, the display of the setting change image is continued, and the grant control means is in the setting change state and during the display of the setting change image, the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). When a game medium (game ball, medal) is won, the awarding control is not performed by the winning, and the game medium is placed in the winning area during the display of the setting change image even after the setting change state is completed. When the prize is won, the grant control is performed by the prize, and the specific information calculation means is in the game medium in the prize area while the setting change image is displayed even when the setting change state is controlled. If the prize is won, the specific information is not calculated by the prize, and if the game medium wins the prize area during the display of the setting change image after the end of the setting change state, the game medium is said to be said. The specific information is calculated by winning a prize. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) and the grant control means (payout control board 120) that control the grant control of game benefits (prize balls, medals) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means controls a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the effect associated with the start of the setting change state. In the game, a transmission means that transmits the first control information (setting change designation command) to the control means and transmits the second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon the end of the setting change state. A specific information calculation means for collecting generated game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) to calculate specific information (normal base value), and an information display unit (information display 113) for the specific information. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is provided with a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. ) Is displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information, and when the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting is performed. Even if the change state is completed, the display of the setting change image is continued, and the grant control means is in the setting change state and is displaying the setting change image in the winning area (various prizes). When a game medium (game ball, medal) is won in the mouth, various starting ports), the grant control is not performed by the winning, and the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state is completed. When the game medium wins a prize in the winning area, the granting control is performed by the winning, and the specific information calculation means is controlled to the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed during the display of the setting change image. When the game medium wins in the winning area, the game information is not collected by the winning, and the game medium is placed in the winning area during the display of the setting change image even after the setting change state is completed. When a prize is won, the game information is collected by the prize. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing the game control and the grant control means (payout control board 120) for controlling the game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the winning determination means for executing the winning determination as to whether or not the game medium has won the prize, and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting is performed. A transmission means for transmitting a second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon termination of the change state is provided, and the effect control means is predetermined upon receiving the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the display unit (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is terminated in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. If the second control information is not normally received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. At this time, the execution of the winning determination is restricted, and the execution of the winning determination is controlled to be possible after the end of the setting change state. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for producing a game based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. It is provided with a volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from (audio output device 9) to a predetermined volume, and is set on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in accordance with the reception of the first control information. The changed image (setting changing screen) is displayed, the display of the setting changing image is terminated when the second control information is received, and the volume cannot be set while the setting changing image is being displayed. Yes, the volume can be set after the display of the setting change image is completed. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is a light emitting unit (light emitting unit) for producing a game effect based on the player performing a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19). It is provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for emitting the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device to a predetermined light amount, and is predetermined in accordance with the reception of the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the display unit (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is terminated in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. The light amount cannot be set during the display, and the light amount can be set after the display of the setting change image is completed. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for producing a game based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from (audio output device 9) to a predetermined volume and the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player, the game The light emitting unit (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, backlight of an image display device) for performing an effect is provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to a predetermined light amount. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) when the first control information is received, and the setting change image is displayed when the second control information is received. When the display is finished and the setting change image is being displayed, the volume and the light amount cannot be set, and after the setting change image is displayed, the volume and the light amount can be set. is there. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for producing a game based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. It is provided with a volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from (audio output device 9) to a predetermined volume, and is set on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in accordance with the reception of the first control information. The changed image (setting changing screen) is displayed, the display of the setting changing image is terminated in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the second control information is normally received while the setting changing image is being displayed. If not, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the volume cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is a light emitting unit (for producing a game effect) based on the player performing a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19). The frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device) are provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to be emitted to a predetermined light amount. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the display unit (first image display device 70) of the above, and the display of the setting change image is terminated in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. If the second control information is not normally received during the display, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the light amount is set while the setting change image is being displayed. Is impossible. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is provided, and the effect control means is a sound output unit for producing a game based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from (audio output device 9) to a predetermined volume and the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player, the game The light emitting unit (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, backlight of an image display device) for performing an effect is provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to a predetermined light amount. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) when the first control information is received, and the setting change image is displayed when the second control information is received. If the display is terminated and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the setting is set. While the changed image is being displayed, the volume and the amount of light cannot be set. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) and the grant control means (payout control board 120) that control the grant control of game benefits (prize balls, medals) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a start condition (a prize of a game medium to a start port). ) Is established, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (variation start) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the variation display of the symbol. A transmission means for transmitting a command), a specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) generated in the game and calculating specific information (normal base value), and the above-mentioned A specific information display unit for displaying specific information on an information display unit (information display 113) is provided, and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined display unit (first image display device) upon receiving the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on 70), the display of the setting change image is terminated when the second control information is received, and the predetermined display is displayed when the third control information is received. If the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed by starting the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol in the unit, the setting is made even if the setting change state is completed. The display of the changed image is continued, and the grant control means is in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) during the display of the setting changed image even when the setting is controlled to the changed state. When the game ball (medal) wins, the awarding control is not performed by the winning, and the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state ends and the setting change image is displayed. Is the case where the game medium wins a prize in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed while the specific information calculation means is controlled to the setting change state. Is the special feature of the prize If the game medium wins a prize in the winning area during the display of the setting change image after the setting change state is completed without calculating the fixed information, the specific information is calculated by the winning. If the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information and normally receives the third control information while displaying the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is displayed. It is designed to end and start the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a start condition (a prize for the game medium to the start port). Based on the establishment, the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the first control information (setting change designation command) are transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting is performed. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the changed state, and the third control information (variation start command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the variation display of the symbol. The specific information calculation means for calculating the specific information (normal base value) by collecting the game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) generated in the game, and the specific information. Is provided on the information display unit (information display 113), and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the screen, the display of the setting change image is terminated when the second control information is received, and the predetermined display unit is displayed when the third control information is received. If the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is displayed even if the setting change state is completed. Is displayed, and the grant control means is in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) during the display of the setting change image even when the setting is changed to the game medium (game ball). , Medal), the awarding control is not performed by the winning, and if the gaming medium wins in the winning area during the display of the setting changing image after the end of the setting changing state, When the awarding control is performed by the winning and the specific information calculation means is controlled to the setting changing state and the gaming medium wins a prize in the winning area while the setting changing image is displayed, the game medium is won. If the game medium wins a prize in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state is completed without calculating the specific information by the winning, the specific information is obtained by the winning. Calculate and control the game When the start condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image after the end of the setting change state, the means starts the variation display of the symbol, and the effect control means uses the second control information. Is not normally received, and when the variable display of the symbol is started while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) and the grant control means (payout control board 120) that control the grant control of game benefits (prize balls, medals) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a start condition (a prize of a game medium to a start port). ) Is established, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (variation start) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the variation display of the symbol. A transmission means for transmitting a command), a specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) generated in the game and calculating specific information (normal base value), and the above-mentioned A specific information display unit for displaying specific information on an information display unit (information display 113) is provided, and the effect control means is provided with a predetermined display unit (first image display device) upon receiving the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on 70), the display of the setting change image is terminated when the second control information is received, and the predetermined display is displayed when the third control information is received. If the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed by starting the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol in the unit, the setting is made even if the setting change state is completed. The display of the changed image is continued, and the grant control means is in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) during the display of the setting changed image even when the setting is controlled to the changed state. When the game ball (medal) wins, the awarding control is not performed by the winning, and the game medium wins in the winning area after the setting change state ends and the setting change image is displayed. Is the case where the game medium wins a prize in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed while the specific information calculation means is controlled to the setting change state. Is the play by the prize If the game medium wins a prize in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state is completed without collecting the technique information, the game information is collected by the winning. If the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information and normally receives the third control information while displaying the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is displayed. It is designed to end and start the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls grants of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. A symbol (special symbol) based on the setting changing means for controlling the setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game medium to the starting port). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the variation display means for executing the variation display and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the effect control is performed with the end of the setting change state. It occurs in the game with the transmission means that transmits the second control information (power-on designation command) to the means and transmits the third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variation display of the symbol. Specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, normal medium outs, normal medium payouts) to calculate specific information (normal base value), and the information display unit (information display 113) for the specific information. The effect control means includes a specific information display means to be displayed on the display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, and the setting change image (setting changing screen). Is displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information, and the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. If the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change image is continuously displayed even if the setting change state is completed, and the grant control means is started. If the game medium (game ball, medal) wins in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting change state is controlled and the setting change image is displayed, If the gaming medium wins a prize in the winning area during the display of the setting change image after the setting change state is completed without performing the grant control by winning, the grant control by the winning is performed and the award control is performed. When the specific information calculation means is controlled to the setting change state and the game medium wins a prize in the prize area while the setting change image is displayed, the specific information calculation means collects the game information by the prize. In the state of the above setting change When the game medium wins a prize in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed after the end, the game information is collected by the winning, and the game control means after the end of the setting change state. If the start condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image, the variation display of the symbol is started, and the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information and changes the setting. When the variable display of the symbol is started while the image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As the 16th configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) and the grant control means (payout control board 120) that control the grant control of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a start condition (a prize for a game medium to a start port). ) Is established, the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (variation start) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the variation display of the symbol. It is provided with a transmission means for transmitting a command) and a prize determination means for executing a prize determination as to whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has won a prize in the prize area (various prize openings, various start ports). The effect control means causes a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting changing screen) with the reception of the first control information, and with the reception of the second control information. The display of the setting change image is terminated, and the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the third control information. 2 When the control information is not normally received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. The execution of the winning determination is restricted, the execution of the winning determination is controlled so as to be possible after the end of the setting change state, and the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change image. When the third control information is normally received while the above is displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated and the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a grant control means (payout control board 120) that controls grants of game benefits (prize balls, prize medals) based on grant information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. A symbol (special symbol) based on the setting changing means for controlling the setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game medium to the starting port). The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the variable display means for executing the variable display and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the effect control is performed with the end of the setting change state. A transmission means for transmitting the second control information (power-on designation command) to the means and transmitting the third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variation display of the symbol, and a winning area (a winning area ( The effect control means is provided with a prize determination means for executing a prize determination as to whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has won a prize at various prize openings and various start ports), and the effect control means receives the first control information. Along with this, a setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70), and the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information. When the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit along with the reception of the third control information and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed. The display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the game control means restricts the execution of the winning determination when the setting change state is controlled, and the setting change. After the end of the state, the execution of the winning determination is controlled so as to be possible, and when the start condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image after the end of the setting change state, the variation display of the symbol is started. When the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information and the variable display of the symbol is started, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4) and starts. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium to the starting port), the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the first control information are provided to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon the end of the setting change state, and the effect is accompanied by the start of the variation display of the symbol. The control means includes a transmission means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command), and the effect control means is based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit (audio output device 9) for producing the effect of the game to a predetermined volume is provided, and a predetermined display is provided in response to the reception of the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the unit (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is terminated in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and the third control information is received. When the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is changed. Even if it is finished, the display of the setting change image is continued, and while the setting change image is being displayed, the volume cannot be set, the second control information is not normally received, and the setting change. If the third control information is normally received while the image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started. After that, the volume can be set. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and starts. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium to the starting port), the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the first control information are provided to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon the end of the setting change state, and the effect is accompanied by the start of the variation display of the symbol. The control means includes a transmission means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command), and the effect control means is based on the player performing a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19). A light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for emitting the light emitting unit (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, image display device backlight) for producing the game effect to a predetermined light amount. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) when the first control information is received, and the setting change image is displayed when the second control information is received. Is terminated, and upon receiving the third control information, the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit, and the second control information is normally displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. If the information is not received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. 2 If the control information is not normally received and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated and the effect symbol is changed. The display is started, and after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the light amount can be set. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes the effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and starts. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium to the starting port), the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) and the first control information are provided to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon the end of the setting change state, and the effect is accompanied by the start of the variation display of the symbol. The control means includes a transmission means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command), and the effect control means is based on a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. , A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit (audio output device 9) for producing the effect of the game to a predetermined volume, and a light amount adjustment operation by the player (up / down buttons of the cross key 19). Based on the operation), the amount of effect light that causes the light emitting unit (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, image display device backlight) to emit light for producing the game is set to a predetermined amount of light. The second control is provided with a light amount setting means for setting, and a setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. When the information is received, the display of the setting change image is terminated, and when the third control information is received, the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit, and the setting change image is displayed. If the second control information is not normally received during the display, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the volume and the above are displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. If the amount of light cannot be set, the second control information is not normally received, and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting is performed. The display of the changed image is terminated and the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the volume and the light amount can be set. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, a game privilege (award) is provided based on a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and the given information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a grant control means (payout control board 120) for controlling the granting of balls (balls, prize medals), and the game control means includes a first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing storage information associated with the progress control. , A setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined setting stored in the first information storage means when the setting changing state is terminated. The first initialization means for initializing the stored information (information other than the set value area of the game RWM area) and the addition control means are initialized with the initialization of the predetermined stored information of the first information storage means. An initialization information transmitting means for transmitting information (power-on designation command) is provided, and the grant control means includes a second information storage means (payout RAM 120c) for storing storage information associated with the grant control, and the initialization. Upon receiving the information, it includes a second initialization means for initializing predetermined storage information (information other than the launch permission flag area in the RWM area) stored in the second information storage means. Further, the game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and the grant control that controls the grant control of the game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes means (payout control board 120), and the game control means is either a first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing storage information associated with the progress control, or a plurality of set values (1 to 4). A setting changing means for controlling the setting changing state that can be set, and a predetermined storage information (other than the setting value area of the game RWM area) stored in the first information storage means when controlling the setting changing state. The initialization information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the first initialization means for initializing (information) and the given control means in association with the initialization of the predetermined stored information of the first information storage means. The grant control means includes an information transmission means, and when the grant control means receives the initialization information, the second information storage means (payout RAM 120c) that stores the storage information associated with the grant control becomes the second information storage means. A second initialization means for initializing the stored predetermined storage information (information other than the launch permission flag area in the RWM area) is provided. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a 21st configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means stores information storage associated with the progress control. Means (main RAM 110c), setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and storage in the information storage means when the setting changing state is terminated. The information storage means includes an initialization means for initializing predetermined storage information (information other than the set value area of the game RWM area), and the information storage means is such that the storage information is initialized by the initialization means. There is now one storage area (an area other than the set value area of the game RWM area) and a second storage area (information area of the information RWM area) in which the storage information is not initialized by the initialization means. There is. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means includes an information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing stored information associated with the progress control, and a plurality of set values (main RAM 110c). A setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set in any of 1 to 4), and predetermined storage information (a game RWM area) stored in the information storage means when controlling the setting changing state. The information storage means includes an initialization means for initializing (information other than the set value area), and the information storage means has a first storage area (set value area of the game RWM area) in which the stored information is initialized by the initialization means. Areas other than the above) and a second storage area (information area of the information RWM area) in which the stored information is not initialized by the initialization means. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). Specific information (normal base value) is calculated by collecting game information (number of outs during normal times, number of payouts during normal times) generated in a game in a predetermined game section and a setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to. The information calculation means includes an information display means for displaying the specific information on the information display unit (information display 113), and the information calculation means changes the set value in the predetermined game section. Is designed to calculate the specific information based on the game information of the game played before the change and the game information of the game played after the change. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). Specific information (normal base value) is calculated by collecting game information (number of outs during normal times, number of payouts during normal times) generated in a game in a predetermined game section and a setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to. The information calculation means includes an information calculation means and an information display means for displaying the specific information on the information display unit, and the information calculation means provides information that does not change due to a change in the set value (normal medium out number, normal medium payout). The number) is collected as the game information. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and a game production control based on control information (commands) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined setting change means. Abnormality detecting means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The effect control means includes a transmission means for transmitting control information (setting change designation command) and transmitting second control information (error designation command) in association with the detection of the predetermined abnormality, and the effect control means is the first control. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) when the information is received, and an error is notified to the predetermined display unit when the second control information is received. Images (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and the abnormality notification image is not displayed while the setting change image is displayed. .. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a 25th configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined setting change means. Abnormality determining means for determining the occurrence of an abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and first control information in the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. A transmission means for transmitting (setting change designation command) and transmitting second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is provided, and the effect control means is of the first control information. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception, and an error notification image (abnormality notification image) is displayed on the predetermined display unit upon reception of the second control information. Illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) are displayed so that the game control means does not determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state. It has become. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic). An error determining means for determining the occurrence of an error, a radio wave error, a door opening error, etc.) and a first control information (setting change designation command) are transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the predetermined setting is performed. The effect control means includes a transmission means for transmitting the second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the abnormality of the above, and the effect control means has a predetermined display unit (first image) in response to the reception of the first control information. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the display device 70), and an abnormality notification image (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error) is displayed on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the second control information. An image, a radio wave error image, a door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, the game control means is configured to be able to determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state, and the effect control means is the setting change image. If the second control information is received while the above is displayed, the setting change image is preferentially displayed. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As the 26th configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a production control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). Abnormality detecting means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon the termination of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted with the detection of the predetermined abnormality. 3 A transmission means for transmitting control information (error designation command) is provided, and the effect control means sets a setting change image on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. (Setting changing screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated with the reception of the second control information, and the error notification image (abnormality notification image) is displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. Illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and while the setting change image is being displayed, the abnormality notification image cannot be displayed, and the setting After the display of the changed image is completed, the abnormality notification image can be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As a 27th configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a production control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a power supply. The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the initial processing means for executing the initial processing (processing for power restoration) based on the closing, and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (power restoration designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the initial process. ) Is provided, and the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. A plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the third control information. , The plurality of effect symbols displayed when the second control information is received and the plurality of effect symbols displayed when the third control information is received are the same effect symbols (initial effect symbol "135"). ). By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

As the 28th configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game production control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a production control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the game control means, and the game control means controls a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a power supply. The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the initial processing means for executing the initial processing (processing for power restoration) based on the closing, and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (power restoration designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the initial process. ) Is provided, and the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receiving the first control information. A plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the second control information, and a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit in accordance with the reception of the third control information. When the plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit, one of the plurality of effect modes (effect modes A to G) is displayed, and the second control information is received. The effect mode displayed in association with the above and the effect mode displayed in association with the reception of the third control information are the same effect mode (effect mode A). By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

The 29th configuration for solving the above problems includes a setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (game medium to the starting port). Based on the establishment of the winning), it is determined whether or not to execute the first special game (small hit game) that is advantageous to the player or the second special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. Based on the means and the determination result of the determination means, the variation display means for executing the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) and the type of the first special game are determined when it is determined to execute the first special game. The determination means includes a first determination means for determining the type of the second special game and a second determination means for determining the type of the second special game when it is determined to execute the second special game, and the determination means is set by the setting changing means. Whether or not to execute the second special game is determined according to the set value (so that the jackpot winning probability is different), and regardless of the set value set by the setting changing means, the first special game is performed. Whether or not to execute the game is determined (so that the small hit winning probabilities are the same), and the second determining means is the first special game regardless of the set value set by the setting changing means. The type is to be decided. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

The thirtieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a setting changing means for controlling a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (game medium to the starting port). Based on the establishment of the winning), a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means. The variable display means to be executed and the determination means for determining the type of the special game when it is determined to execute the special game are provided, and the determination means corresponds to the set value set by the setting change means. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game (so that the jackpot winning probability is different), and the type of the special game and the ratio of determining each special game are set values set by the setting changing means. It is the same regardless. By doing so, it is possible to change the advantage of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game changes according to the type of the jackpot game (big hit special symbol) and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, but all the jackpot games It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state after the end, and shifts to a low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state or a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state when a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed. In this case, the number of fluctuation displays executed in the high-probability time-saving game state may be the same regardless of the set value, or the variation for each set value so that the continuation rate of the high-probability time-saving game state is the same. You may set the number of times of display.

In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after all the jackpot games are completed and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is normally terminated. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

In addition, when the game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the big winning opening in a specific round game of the big hit game, the game ball shifts to a high-accuracy time-short game state after the end of the big hit game, and the game ball passes through the specific area. If this is not done, the gaming machine may be used as a gaming machine that shifts to a low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the game using the medal (game medium) as the gaming value (giving condition is satisfied). It can also be used for a spinning machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a predetermined amount of prize medals to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 General drawing gate 45 1st starting port 47 2nd starting port 50 1st big winning opening 53 2nd big winning opening 70 1st image display device 71 2nd image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
An effect control means that controls the effect of the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means, and
A discharge control means for controlling the discharge of the game medium to the player is provided.
The game control means
A setting change means that controls a setting change state that can be set to any of multiple setting values,
A transmission means for transmitting the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state and transmitting the second control information to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state is provided.
The effect control means
A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a predetermined volume based on the adjustment operation performed by the operation of the first operation unit that can be operated by the player is provided.
The volume setting means
Based on the adjustment operation performed by the operation of the second operation unit that can be operated by the game clerk, it is possible to set the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output unit to a predetermined volume.
A setting change image is displayed on a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information.
Upon receiving the second control information, the display of the setting change image is terminated, and the display is terminated.
If the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed.
Showing the setting changed images, while situations that der impossible to set the volume of the presentation sound by the operation of the first operating portion, adjustment operation of the volume of the presentation sound by the operation of the second operating unit Is in a possible state,
The discharge control means
The emission control can be executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a prize in the winning area or that the game medium lending operation has been performed.
During the setting change state, the discharge control based on the winning of the game medium in the winning area is not executed.
During the setting change state, it is possible to execute the discharge control based on the operation of lending the game medium.
After the end of the setting change state and while the setting change image is being displayed, the discharge control based on the winning of the game medium in the winning area and the lending operation of the game medium are performed. A gaming machine characterized in that emission control can be executed.

Images